Home

Owner`s Manual

1. 415 B Bulb Replacement 044 416 EELISSHISHIDS soseer arse Re ERROR EER 416 AEOS Lat as tae ES ERA yai DES PERSE 418 o Tail Lamps Rear Turn Signals And Backup Eie AE te ae ee ES SSO eee ee 419 license Lamp ses cack es EDELE SR eaS 419 O Center High Mounted Stoplamp 420 W Fluid Capacities 0004 421 B Fluids Lubricants And Genuine Parts 422 BEE IE 22 sane ode HER d E SERE DRIE dea 422 set ONSE aoe his m 423 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 381 ENGINE COMPARTMENT 2 0L MG a T n d e i 070306968 1 Washer Fluid Reservoir 6 Integrated Power Module 2 Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 7 Battery Under Cover 3 Engine Oil Fill 8 Coolant Pressure Cap 4 Air Cleaner Filter 9 Engine Oil Dipstick 5 Brake Fluid Reservoir 10 Engine Coolant Reservoir 382 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M ENGINE COMPARTMENT 2 4L GER SE o o om 070305628 6 Battery Under Cover 7 Air Cleaner Filter 1r 1 Washer Fluid Reservo 2 Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 3 Engine Oil Fill 8 Coolant Pressure Cap 9 Engine Oil Dipstick 4 Brake Fluid Reservoir 10 Engine Coolant Reservoir 5 Integrated Power Module N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 383 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD II Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated Onboard Diagnostic system called OBD II This system monitors the
2. N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173 WARNING WARNING Continued Cargo tie down loops are not safe anchors for a e Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear child seat tether strap In a sudden stop or collision a loop could pull loose and allow the child seat to come loose A child could be badly injured Use only the anchors provided for child seat tethers The weight and position of cargo and passengers can change the vehicle center of gravity and ve hicle handling To avoid loss of control resulting in personal injury follow these guidelines for loading your vehicle Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor Put heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible Continued axle Too much weight or improperly placed weight over or behind the rear axle can cause the rear of the vehicle to sway Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of the seatback This could impair visibility or be come a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision To help protect against personal injury passengers should not be seated in the rear cargo area The rear cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes only not for passengers who should sit in seats and use seat belts 174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id Fold Down Speakers If Equipped REAR WINDOW FEATURES When the liftgate is open the speakers can swing down off the trim panel to face rearward for t
3. Compass Calibration If the compass appears erratic or inaccurate and the variance has been properly set you may wish to manu ally recalibrate the compass To manually calibrate the compass 1 Start the engine and leave the transmission in the PARK position 2 Press and release the EVIC button less than one second several times until the EVIC displays the Per sonal Settings Customer Programmable Features menu 3 Once in the Personal Settings Customer Program mable Features menu press and release the EVIC button less than one second several times until Cali brate Compass Yes is displayed 4 Press the EVIC button more than one second this will place the Compass in calibration mode The CAL indicator will come on continuously in the EVIC display 208 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL to indicate that the compass is now in the calibration mode and that the vehicle can now be driven to calibrate 5 To complete the compass calibration drive the vehicle in one or more complete 360 degree circle under 5 mph 8 km h in an area free from power lines and large metallic objects until the CAL indicator turns off The compass will now function normally NOTE Press the EVIC button less than one second from the Calibrate Compass Yes screen will exit the EVIC Customer Programmable Features and return it to its normal operating mode SALES CODE REQ AM FM STEREO RADIO AND 6 DISC C
4. M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 426 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M EMISSIONS CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in bold type must be done at the times or mileages specified to ensure the continued proper functioning of the emissions control system These and all other maintenance services in cluded in this manual should be done to provide best vehicle performance and reliability More freguent main tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating conditions such as dusty areas and very short trip driving Inspection and service should also be done anytime a malfunction is suspected NOTE Maintenance replacement or repair of the emis sions control devices and systems on your vehicle may be performed by any automotive repair establishment or individual using any automotive part that has been certified pursuant to U S EPA or in the State of Califor nia California Air Resources Board regulations MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance On Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC equipped vehicles Oil Change Required will be displayed in the EVIC and a single chime will sound indicating that an oil change is necessary On Non EVIC equipped vehicles Change Oil will flash in the instrument cluster odometer and a single chime will sound indicating
5. CAUTION Because of the reduced ground clearance do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with the compact spare installed Damage to the vehicle may result Tire Spinning When stuck in mud sand snow or ice conditions do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck For additional information refer to Freeing A Stuck Vehicle in Section 6 STARTING AND OPERATING 331 WARNING Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam age or failure A tire could explode and injure some one Do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed 5 055007576 Tread Wear Indicators Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires 1 Worn Tire to help you in determining when your tires should be 2 New le replaced These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread grooves They will appear as bands when the tread depth becomes 1 16 in 2 mm When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the tire should be replaced 332 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id Life of Tire The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including but not limited to e Dri
6. Es ee 176 Limpar ie eie de AAR MAA EE IN 127 Maintenance Free Battery s 45 ers teens an as 390 Maintenance General ees 386 Maintenance Procedures 24a de x reet 386 Maintenance Schedule vos s 39 9 RPRIATS 426 Malfunction Indicator Light Check Engine 195 384 Manual SERVICE 4544 6445 su be ER x SUPE REA 451 Manual Transaxle 278 281 405 DOW SMS genet dup a cos IG EE Rd 282 Fluid Level Check Less 405 406 Frequency of Fluid Change 405 406 407 Lubricant Selection 405 406 Map Reading Tights sg was a deo ssancatesa da 143 Master Cylinder Brakes 0 0 402 MIOS aciem xd wave eee dae eee ee sa EEN es 87 Automate DIMMING si sees owed BE SR N a 88 Electric Powered ius tas ao euros BE ere db hs 89 Extenor Folding scc sen se ered seer ae RE 91 Heated 4454s sae ase es EUREN ue oe OO 91 OUISICG ua uos sx owe We bees OE OE ERU eR 90 Rearview eee 87 p Tr 92 Modifications Alterations Vehicle 8 Monitor Tire Pressure System i 243a vue xS ERES 335 Mopar iS Pr 385 450 466 INDEX NEE id Multi Function Control Lever 139 New Vehicle Break In Period 79 Occupant Restraints s an de cheese 4 VR d 36 61 65 Occupant Restraints Sedan 57 58 61 64 Octane Rating Gasoline Fuel LL 344 Odometer 2426464446644 540 266024000448555 193 TD oe Gs tee He eee a PITT 21195
7. Even though the system is designed for users speaking in North American English French and Spanish ac cents the system may not always work for some When navigating through an automated system such as voice mail or when sending a page at the end of speaking the digit string make sure to say Send NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113 Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is not in motion is recommended It is not recommended to store similar sounding names in the uconnect phonebook Phonebook Downloaded and uconnect phone Lo cal name recognition rate is optimized when the entries are not similar Numbers must be spoken in single digits 800 must be spoken eight zero zero not eight hundred You can say O letter O for 0 zero Even though international dialing for most number combinations is supported some shortcut dialing number combinations may not be supported In a convertible vehicle system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down 114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Phone Far End Audio Performance e Audio guality is maximized under e low to medium blower setting e low to medium vehicle speed e low road noise e smooth road surface e fully closed windows e dry weather conditions and e operation from the driver s seat e Performance such as audio clarity echo and loudness to a large degree rely on
8. N AHR In Reset Position NOTE e If you have difficulties or problems resetting the head restraints see an authorized dealer e For safety reasons have the Active Head Restraints checked by a qualified specialist at an authorized dealer Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System BeltAlert If the driver s seat belt has not been buckled within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle and if the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h the BeltAlert will alert the driver to buckle the seat belt The driver should also instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts Once the warning is triggered the BeltAlert will con tinue to chime and flash the Seat Belt Reminder Light for 96 seconds or until the driver s seat belt is buckled The BeltAlert will be reactivated if the driver s seat belt is unbuckled for more than 10 seconds and the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53 BeltAlert Programming BeltAlert can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer or by performing the following procedure NOTE The following steps must occur within the first 60 seconds of the ignition switch being turned to the ON or START position Chrysler Group LLC does not recom mend deactivating BeltAlert 1 Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and buckle the driver s seat belt 2 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and wait for the Seat Bel
9. START 3 Remove the key from the ignition switch lock cylinder N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15 Locking Doors With A Key You can insert the key with either side up To lock the door turn the key to the right To unlock the door turn the key to the left Refer to Body Lubrication under Maintenance Procedures in Section 7 Key In lgnition Reminder Opening the driver s door when the key is in the ignition and the ignition position is LOCK or ACC sounds a signal to remind you to remove the key NOTE With the driver s door open and the key in the ignition the power door locks will not lock and Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter will not function SENTRY KEY The Sentry Key Immobilizer System prevents unautho rized vehicle operation by disabling the engine The system does not need to be armed or activated Operation is automatic regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked The system uses ignition keys that have an embedded electronic chip transponder to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation Therefore only keys that are pro grammed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle The system will shut the engine off in two seconds if someone uses an invalid key to try to start the engine NOTE A key that has not been programmed is also considered an invalid key even if it is cut to fit the ignition switch lock cylinder for that vehicle During norma
10. a our v E ER Restraints Occupant aue es seit gore 9 4906 342988 Retractable Cargo Area Cover is se 20344 46 Roll Over Warming acad kchipSs44LLERBS RS ROOF TU DeC POP Los wore ueu vr E KERE ces ces Rotation Tires 2s ace oe o SUE Eo 3d Safety Checks Inside Vehicle Safety Checks Outside Vehicle 1 me raw gna Safety Defects Reporting sls Dalely EXhatsE ag rerea n ee eee riri e aat a Safety Information Tire Daley IDS cose dug eke ees shoes oe VRAE RE Satellite Radio Antenna 2221452 REELE RES de Satellite Radio uconnect studios Schedule Maintenance SS 426 Seat Belt Maintenance ess 412 Seat Belt Reminder sis c rR REI YS 02 Seat Belts xau cece be SO m e EER EE 36 81 Adjustable Shoulder Belt oi iss ux aere aus 42 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage 42 And Pregnant Women miss xc pU RES RED ods 54 Child Restraint enn 70 dT seg eye coe ses bore see e EE Ta s e 53 8 ende ORE 94 9 Gare OE AE ee hehe N 37 WASPCCHOM se 284 Gaus 9pm toad ee GP oa 81 Pretensioners ss eg v els R4 4 36 ER BAR ES Eb 48 Rear Seat SS ee 37 Sedis wus AO P M EO eS ee 125 ele GODE soe vae RS PAD HER eae ae 126 Heated is GRA ean eh ee yee RES ER Se 130 Lumbar SUDDOPL garies eits tee ee Ga ee 127 hear DOS RASSE SR a eeu ee 254 135 Rear Folding Sedan sepie godere KRAKE RE 135 N INDEX 469 Seatback Release llle 128 DUN A oe one EE
11. blank Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load SL tire Extra Load XL Extra load or reinforced tire Light Load Light load tire C D E Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Load Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carr Maximum Pressure Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire ee STARTING AND OPERATING 321 Tire Identification Number TIN Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire tires as mounted on the vehicle If the TIN is not found on however the date code may only be on one side Tires the outboard side then you will find it on the inboard with white sidewalls will have the full TIN including the side of the tire date code located on the white sidewall side of the tire EXAMPLE DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT Department of Transportation This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use MA Code representing the tire manufacturing location two di its L9 Code representing the tire size two digits ABCD Code used by the tire manufacturer one to four digits 03 Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured two digits 03 means
12. in Section 3 Operating Instructions Video Entertainment System VES If Equipped Refer to separate Video Entertainment System VES Guide 045003761 REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS IF Remote Sound System Controls EQUIPPED Back View Of Steering Wheel The remote sound system controls are located on the rear The right hand control is a rocker type switch with a surface of the steering wheel Reach behind the wheel to pushbutton in the center Pressing the top of the switch access the switches will increase the volume and pressing the bottom of the switch will decrease the volume N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 259 The button located in the center of the right hand control will switch modes to Radio or CD The left hand control is a rocker type switch with a pushbutton in the center The function of the left hand control is different depending on which mode you are in The following describes the left hand control operation in each mode Radio Operation Press the top of the switch to SEEK up for the next listenable station Press the bottom of the switch to SEEK down for the next listenable station The button located in the center of the left hand control will tune to the next preset station that you have pro grammed in the radio preset pushbuttons CD Player Press the top of the switch once to go to the next track on the CD Press the bottom of the switch once to go to the beginning of the
13. Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in B WARNING the tread area because of sidewall flexing Consult your authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi mum load is dangerous The added strain on your Compact Spare Tire If Equipped The compact spare is for temporary emergency use with radial tires It is engineered to be used on your style vehicle only Since this tire has limited tread life the original tire should be repaired or replaced and rein stalled at the first opportunity tires could cause them to fail You could have a serious accident Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph 120 km h 330 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id WARNING e Temporaty use spare tires are for emergency use only With these tires do not drive more than 50 mph 80 km h Temporary use spare tires have limited tread life When the tread is worn to the tread wear indica tors the temporary use spare tire needs to be replaced Be sure to follow the warnings which apply to your spare Failure to do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel since the wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare Do not install more than one compact spare tire wheel on the vehicle at any given time
14. EL Ed ADE a a bait Rot sie dert Red dept x 290 HI Driving Through Water iss oes Red OR ED ES 298 HL After Driving Off Road xs 92d REG 300 la Power Steering ses SE Es ss Se 301 O Power Steering Fluid Check 302 W Parking Brake orsus Eie eens 3 303 M Brake iem serari rea Sache Pee ED es 305 O Anti Lock Brake System ABS s eet es 306 NS TA TING AND OPERATING 275 lll Electronic Brake Control System 308 W Tires General Information 326 O Anti Lock Brake System ABS 308 O Tite Pressure seek in 3 9 3S pene di 326 G Brake Assist System BAS 309 O Tire Inflation Pressures 927 oO Traction Control System TCS sie asse ss 310 H Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation 329 O Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM 310 El diad y Ties prsne 8 Races t Rd E DE 329 o Hill Descent Control HDC If Equipped 311 XO Compact Spare Tire If Equipped 329 O Hill Start Assist HSA Manual Transaxle O Tire Spinning E PE O Tread Wear Indicators 331 O Electronic Stability Control ESC 314 DIe Of Tire LL L eee 339 N Tire Safety Information 318 EE N 339 EMS I baa AR PAR ee on ie Chans i s he RAD MR eee ea N 333 RS ME IT en EN Snow Tires cate ou oe EI EE EE oes ue 334 O Tire Loading And Tire Pressure 022 B Tire Rotation Recommendations 334 276 STARTING AND OPERATI
15. Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped in Section 4 e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following procedure 1 Close all doors and place the key in the ignition switch 2 Within 15 seconds cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON and then back to LOCK four times ending up in the LOCK position do not start the engine 3 Within 30 seconds depress the power door LOCK switch to lock the doors 4 A single chime will indicate the completion of the programming 5 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting 30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id NOTE Automatic Unlock Doors on Exit Programming e If you do not hear the chime it means that the system The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature can be did not enter the programming mode and you will enabled or disabled as follows need toep bie Oe oe e For vehicles equipped with the EVIC refer to Per e Use the Automatic Door Locks feature in accordance sonal Settings Customer Programmable Features with local laws under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Automatic Unlock Doors on Exit If Equipped in Section 4 The doors will unlock automatically if e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the 1 The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is en following procedure abled 1 Close all doors and place the key in the ignition 2 The
16. In this mode you may say the following commands Satellite Radio P To switch to satellite radio mode say Sat or Satellite 2 ds OC eae Radio In this mode you may say the following com e Next Track to play the next track Fa mands e Previous Track to play the previous track Ch l h he ch l l aa a i eg Main Menu to switch to the main menu spoken number Memo To switch to the voice recorder mode say Memo In e Previous Channel to select the previous channel this mode you may say the following commands e Next Channel to select the next channel e List Channel to hear a list of available channels e New Memo to record a new memo During the recording you may press the u button to stop recording You proceed by saying one of the following e Radio Menu to switch to the radio menu commands e Select Name to say the name of a channel e Main Menu to switch to the main menu Save to save the memo 124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id System Setup To switch to system setup say Setup In this mode you may say the following commands Continue to continue recording Delete to delete the recording e Play Memos to play previously recorded memos During the playback you may press the 4 button to stop playing memos You proceed by saying one of the following com
17. O Programming HomeLink O Gate Operator Canadian Programming 155 O Using Home ink is siesp ars ree 3 156 O Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button sis ER oe RR Rek 156 El ee epang erie urere AS 156 EL Troubleshooting TIPS ad acer 9 5 eo ao ge DE 157 O General Information us 6444 pod BR pk os 157 W Power Sunroof If Equipped 158 OOpenme Ihe SUBPOD 35 622 s e00 acess 159 86 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie B Closing The Sunroof 159 O Pinch Protect Feature APid Protect Override esce ama Res 160 O Venting Sunroof Express 160 Hi 5 nshade Operation asse ee ES nbd s 160 EL Wind BUMCUNS usos SUE LARR es be eS DORS 160 HI Sunroot Maintenance cues eso et aks 160 Blenition Off Operation sese bana ous 161 Bi Electrical Power Outlets 0 161 W Power Inverter If Equipped 163 W Cupholders PITT 165 joo T ET EE TETEE 166 O Glove Compartment And Storage Bin 166 H Door Storage Bl Console Features ll Cargo Area Features 0 Cargo Light Removable Self Recharging Flashlight H Cargo Cover O Removable Load Floor O Cargo Tie Down Loops 5o ww sow cane 25 3 Fold Down Speakers If Equipped ll Rear Window Features o Rear Window Wiper Washer O Rear Window Defroster ll Roof Luggage Rack If Equipped 167 N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 87 MIRRORS Inside Day Night Mirro
18. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position within 60 seconds After 10 seconds a single chime will sound In addition the Vehicle Security Light will stop flashing To indicate that programming is complete the Vehicle Security Light will turn on again for three seconds and then turn off The new Sentry Key is programmed The Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter will also be pro grammed during this procedure Repeat this procedure to program up to eight keys If you do not have a programmed Sentry Key contact your authorized dealer for details NOTE Ifa programmed key is lost see your authorized dealer to have all remaining keys erased from the sys tem s memory This will prevent the lost key from starting 18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id your vehicle The remaining keys must then be repro grammed All vehicle keys must be taken to an authorized dealer at the time of service to be reprogrammed General Information The Sentry Key system complies with FCC rules Part 15 and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undes ired operation VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM IF EGUIPPED This Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the doors liftgate and ignition switch for unauthorized operation When the alarm
19. V card entry via Bluetooth The system is now ready to accept phonebook entries from your phone using the Bluetooth Object Exchange Profile OBEX Please see your phone Owner s Manual for specific instructions on how to send these entries from your phone NOTE e The phone handset must support Bluetooth OBEX transfers of phonebook entries to use this feature e Some phones cannot send phonebook entries if they are already connected to any system via Bluetooth and you may see a message on the phone display that the Bluetooth link is busy In this case the user must first disconnect or drop the Bluetooth connection to 100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M the uconnect phone and then send the address book entry via Bluetooth Please see your phone Owner s Manual for specific instructions on how to drop the Bluetooth connection e If the phonebook entry is longer than 24 characters it will only use the first 24 characters Edit uconnect Phonebook Entries NOTE e Editing names in the phonebook is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion e Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited e Press the amp button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Edit e You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook entry that you wish to edit e Next choose the number designation home work cellular or pager
20. WARNING Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are Relying too much on your passenger side mirror could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the passenger side mirror 90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id Outside Mirror Driver Side Outside Mirror Passenger Side Adjust the flat outside mirror to center on the adjacent Adjust the convex outside mirror to center on the adja lane of traffic with a slight overlap of the view obtained cent lane of traffic with a slight overlap of the view on the inside mirror obtained on the inside mirror 030406693 driver s Side Mirror Directions Passenger Side Mirror Directions NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91 WARNING Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are Relying too much on your passenger side mirror could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the passenger side mirror Folding Outside Mirrors The outside mirrors are hinged and may be moved manually either forward or rearward to resist damage Folding the Outside Mirrors The hinges have three detent positions full forw
21. WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS HOT WEATHER Open the windows start the vehicle press the button to turn recirculate off AND VEHICLE INTERIOR IS Set the Fan control to the high position full clockwise Press the A C button _ VERY HOT Set the Mode control at or between and 3 Set the temperature control O _ to full cool After the hot air is pushed from the vehicle press the button to turn recirculate on and roll up the windows Once you are comfortable press the button to turn recirculate off and adjust the temperature control for comfort Press the button to turn recirculate off If it s sunny set the Mode control at or near 4 and turn the air conditioning on If it s cloudy or dark set the Mode control at or near 2 COOL OR COLD Press the button to turn recirculate off HUMID CONDITIONS If it s sunny set the Mode control at or between and 44 then turn the air AY conditioning on If it s cloudy or dark set the Mode control at or near and turn 646 6 n the air conditioning on If the windows begin to fog set Mode control at or between and G COLD DRY Set the Mode control at or near s If it is sunny you may want more upper air In CONDITIONS this case set the Mode control at or between and d In very cold weather gia if you need extra heat at the windshield set the Mode control at or near the 3 045606725 STARTING AND OPERATING CONTENTS li Starting Procedures ss
22. vehicle and trailer Always connect the chains to the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch e Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for turning corners Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade When parking apply the parking brake on the tow vehicle Put the tow vehicle automatic transmission in PARK Always block or chock Continued the trailer wheels e GCWR must not be exceeded and will not shift during travel When trailering cargo that is not fully secured dynamic load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the driver to control You could lose control of your vehicle and have an accident Continued NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 359 WARNING Continued Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Refer to e Total weight must be distributed between the tow Tires General Information in this section for proper vehicle and the trailer such that the following four tire inflation procedures ratings are not exceeded 1 GVWR Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pres 2 GTW sures before trailer usage 3 GAWR Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage 4 Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch uti before towing a trailer Refer to Tires General Infor lized This requirement may limit the ability to mation
23. Always leave the system OFF when you are not using it To Set a Desired Speed When the vehicle has reached the desired speed press down on the lever and release Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed NOTE The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and on level ground before pressing the SET lever To Deactivate A soft tap on the brake pedal pulling the speed control lever toward you CANCEL normal braking or clutch pressure while slowing the vehicle will deactivate speed control without erasing the set speed memory Pressing the ON OFF button or turning off the ignition switch erases the set speed memory To Resume Speed To resume a previously set speed push the RESUME ACCEL lever up and release Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph 32 km h To Vary the Speed Setting When the Electronic Speed Control is set you can in crease speed by pushing up and holding the RESUME ACCEL lever If the lever is continually held in the 150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M RESUME ACCEL position the set speed will continue to increase until the lever is released then the new set speed will be established Tapping RESUME ACCEL once will result in a 1 mph 1 6 km h speed increase Each time the lever is tapped speed increases so that tapping the lever three times will increase speed by 3 mph 4 8 km h etc To decrease speed while the Electronic Speed Con
24. Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with dia grams charts and detailed illustrations These practi cal manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer controlled ve hicle systems and features They show exactly how to find and correct problems the first time using step by step troubleshooting and drivability procedures proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and equipment IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE Se Owner s Manuals These Owner s Manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC ve hicles Included are starting operating emergency and maintenance procedures as well as specifications capabilities and safety tips Call toll free at Or 1 800 890 4038 U S 1 800 387 1143 Canada Visit us on the Worldwide Web at www techauthority com N F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 453 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES The following tire grading categories were established by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration The specific grade rating assigned by the tire s manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your vehicle All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety requirements in addition to these grades Treadwear The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire whe
25. Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering system as the chemicals can damage your power steering components Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty CAUTION Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering fluid temperature and it should be avoided when possible Damage to the power steering pump may occur WARNING Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and with the engine off to prevent injury from moving parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading Do not overfill Use only manufacturer s recommended power steering fluid Power Steering Fluid Check Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined service interval is not required The fluid should only be checked if a leak is suspected abnormal noises are If necessary add fluid to restore to the proper indicated level With a clean cloth wipe any spilled fluid from all surfaces Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Section 7 for the correct fluid type PARKING BRAKE Before leaving the vehicle make sure that the parking brake is fully applied Also be certain to leave an automatic transaxle in PARK or manual transaxle in REVERSE or first gear The parking brake lever is located in the center console To apply the parking brake pull the lever up as firmly as possible To release the parking brake pull the lever up slightly pre
26. If you would like the system to go into Recirculation Mode you must first move the Mode knob to Panel Panel Floor and then press the Recirculation button This feature reduces the possibility of window fogging Operating Tips NOTE Refer to the chart at the end of this section for suggested control settings for various weather condi tions Summer Operation The engine cooling system in air conditioned vehicles must be protected with a high quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect against engine overheating A solution of 50 ethylene glycol antifreeze coolant and 50 water is recommended Refer to Maintenance Procedures in Section 7 of this manual for proper coolant selection Winter Operation Use of the air Recirculation Mode during winter months is not recommended because it may cause window fogging Vacation Storage Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out of service ie vacation for two weeks or more run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower settings This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 271 Window Fogging Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly re moved by turning the mode selector to Defrost The Defrost Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear windshield and provide su
27. Scrolling up or down the list is done by turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob Selecting a folder by pressing the TUNE SCROLL control knob will begin playing the files contained in that folder or the next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain playable files The folder list will time out after five seconds INFO Button DISC Mode for MP3 WMA Play Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through the following TAG information Song Title Artist File Name and Folder Name if available Press the INFO button once more to return to elapsed time priority mode Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or more and radio will display song titles for each file Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds to return to elapsed time display Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 WMA player cassette player or microphone and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil iary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to the proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down SEEK Button Auxiliary Mode No functio
28. This could cause a collision with another vehicle or object Always remember the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle Disabling Enabling HSA If you wish to turn on or off the HSA system it can be done using the Customer Programmable Features in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Sec tion 4 of this manual For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following steps NOTE You must complete Steps 1 through 8 within 90 seconds 1 Center the steering wheel front wheels pointing straight forward Shift the transaxle into NEUTRAL Apply the parking brake Release the clutch pedal 2 3 4 Start the engine 5 6 Rotate the steering wheel one half turn to the left 7 Press the ESC Off switch located in the lower switch bank below the climate controls four times within 20 seconds The ESC Off Indicator Light should turn on and turn off two times 314 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id 8 Rotate the steering wheel back to center and then an additional half turn to the right 9 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and then back to the ON position If the sequence was completed properly the ESC Off Indicator Light will blink several times to confirm HSA is disabled 10 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to it s previous setting Electronic Stability Control ESC
29. Voice Recognition Button uconnect phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the uconnect phone feature if equipped Refer to uconnect phone in Section 3 If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With uconnect message will display on the radio screen Phone Button uconnect phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the uconnect phone feature if equipped Refer to uconnect phone in Section 3 210 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With uconnect message will display on the radio screen TIME Button Press the TIME button to alternate locations of the time and frequency display Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save the time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait five seconds The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button and selecting the SET HOME CLOCK entry Once in this display follow the above procedure starting at
30. and Extreme Cold Weather proce dures it may be flooded Push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it there Crank the engine for no more than 15 seconds This should clear any excess fuel in case the engine is flooded Leave the ignition key in the ON position release the accelerator pedal and repeat the Normal Starting procedure WARNING Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the vehicle This could result in flash fire causing serious personal injury engine for more than 15 seconds at a time Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again After Starting The idle speed will automatically decrease as the engine warms up ENGINE BLOCK HEATER IF EQUIPPED The engine block heater warms engine coolant and permits quicker starts in cold weather Connect the cord to a standard 110 115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a erounded three wire extension cord STARTING AND OPERATING 281 WARNING Fully press the clutch pedal before you shift gears As you release the clutch pedal lightly press the accelerator Remember to disconnect the cord before driving pedal Damage to the 110 115 Volt electrical cord could cause electrocution MANUAL TRANSAXLE IF EQUIPPED Five Speed Manual Transaxle 5 You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle unattended without having the parking brake fully applied The
31. automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off once the system receives the updated tire pressures The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information For example your vehicle may have a recommended cold parked for more than three hours placard pressure of 30 psi 207 kPa If the ambient temperature is 68 F 20 C and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi 186 kPa a temperature drop to 20 F 7 C will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 26 psi 179 kPa This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi 186 kPa but the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will still be ON In this situation the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF only after the tires are inflated to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value N STARTING AND OPERATING 337 CAUTION NOTE e The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care e The TPMS has been optimized for the original and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and or condition warnings have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when us ing replacement equipment that is no
32. dealer as soon as possible Also have the Occupant Restraint Controller System serviced as well N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67 WARNING Continued e Do not attempt to modify any part of your ad vanced airbag system The airbag may inflate accidentally or may not function properly if modi fications are made Take your vehicle to an autho rized dealer for any advanced airbag system ser vice If your seat including your trim cover and Maintaining Your Airbag System WARNING e Modifications to any part of the airbag system could cause it to fail when you need it You could be injured if the airbag system is not there to protect you Do not modify the components or wiring including adding any kind of badges or cushion needs to be serviced in any way includ ing removal or loosening tightening of seat attach ment bolts take the vehicle to your authorized dealer Only manufacturer approved seat accesso stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side of the instrument panel Do not modify the front bumper vehicle body structure or add aftermarket side steps or running boards It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the airbag system yourself Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an airbag system Continued ries may be used If it is necessary to modify an advanced airbag system for persons with disabili ties contact your authorized deal
33. e Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the form of short audio mutes e Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can cause intermittent reception e Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can cause signal blockage Operating Instructions uconnect studios Satellite Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next channel in Satellite mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new channel until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass channels without stopping until you release it 256 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN SCAN Button When Eguipped Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next channel pausing for eight seconds before con tinuing to the next To stop the search press the SCAN button a second time INFO Button Except REU Radio Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display informa tion between Artist Song Title and Composer if avail able Also pressing and holding the INFO button for an additional three seconds will make the radio display the song title all of the time press and hold again to return to normal display INFO Button REU Radio Pressing the INFO button will display information about Artist Song Title and Composer if
34. flash to pass operation Instrument Panel Dimming Rotate the center portion of the lever to the extreme bottom position to fully dim the instrument panel lights and prevent the interior lights from illuminating when a door is opened Rotate the center portion of the lever up to increase the brightness of the instrument panel lights when the park ing lights or headlights are on Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the next detent position to brighten the odometer and radio when the parking lights or headlights are on Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the last detent to turn on the interior lighting UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143 light off The lights also come on when a door is opened or the dimmer control is turned fully upward past the second detent 031407549 Dimmer Control Map Reading Lights These lights are mounted between the sun visors above 81790082 the rear view mirror Each light is turned on by pressing Map Reading Lights the button Press the button a second time to turn the 144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NOTE The lights will remain on until the switch is pressed a second time so be sure they have been turned off before leaving the vehicle They will not turn off automatically WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS XX The windshield wiper washer control lever is located on the right side of the steering column The front wipers are ope
35. if your cellular service plan provides three way calling this feature can be accessed through the uconnect phone Check with your cellular service provider for the features that you have Answer or Reject an Incoming Call No Call Currently in Progress When you receive a call on your cellular phone the uconnect phone will interrupt the vehicle audio sys tem if on and will ask if you would like to answer the call Press the amp button to accept the call To reject the call press and hold the amp button until you hear a single beep indicating that the incoming call was rejected N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103 Answer or Reject an Incoming Call Call Currently in Progress If a call is currently in progress and you have another incoming call you will hear the same network tones for call waiting that you normally hear when using your cellular phone Press the button to place the current call on hold and answer the incoming call NOTE The uconnect phone compatible phones in the market today do not support rejecting an incoming call when another call is in progress Therefore the user can only answer an incoming call or ignore it Making a Second Call While Current Call is in Progress To make a second call while you are currently on a call press the amp button and say Dial or Call followed by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to call The first call will be on hold while th
36. in this section for the proper inspection pro always achieve the 10 to 15 range of tongue cedure weight as a percentage of total trailer weight When replacing tires refer to Tires General Informa tion in this section for proper tire replacement proce dures Replacing tires with a higher load carrying Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact capacity will not increase the vehicles GVWR and spare tire GAWR limits Towing Requirements Tires 360 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id Towing Requirements Trailer Brakes CAUTION D t int t the h li ae EE Ri ee puse ao If the trailer weighs more than 1 000 lbs 454 kg vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer j loaded it should have its own brakes and they This could cause inadequate braking and possible should be of adequate capacity Failure to do this Pe as could lead to accelerated brake lining wear higher An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is brake pedal effort and longer stopping distances required when towing a trailer with electronically actuated brakes When towing a trailer equipped with WARNING a hydraulic surge actuated brake system an electronic WARNING brake controller is not required e Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle s hydraulic brake lines It can overload your brake system and cause it to fail You might not have brakes when you need them and could have an accident Towing
37. it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc 236 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pressing the DISC AUX button will change the mode to auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press this button to change the display to time of day The time of day will display for five seconds when ignition is OFF SALES CODE RES RSC AM FM STEREO RADIO WITH CD PLAYER MP3 AUX JACK AND SIRIUS RADIO NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of the radio faceplate 042305233 RES RSC Radio NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 237 Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Push the ON VOLUME control knob to turn on the
38. matically apply the brakes to control downhill speed to STARTING AND OPERATING 311 between 4 mph 7 km h and 6 mph 9 km h depending on terrain The system is activated by placing the vehicle in Off Road mode and placing the shift lever in LOW or REVERSE Refer to Safe Off Road Driving under Starting and Operating in Section 5 When HDC is properly enabled the Hill Decent Control Light in the instrument cluster will be illuminated af e HDC has the capability to sense terrain and will only activate when the vehicle is descending a hill It will not activate on level ground If desired HDC can be fully deactivated by putting the vehicle into ESC Full Off mode This is done by pressing and holding the ESC Off button for five seconds Refer to Electronic Stability Control ESC in this section of the manual 312 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id HDC operation can be overridden with brake application to slow the vehicle down below the HDC control speed Conversely if more speed is desired during HDC control the accelerator pedal will increase vehicle speed like normal When either the brake or the accelerator is released HDC will control the vehicle back to the origi nal set speed HDC is only intended for low speed off road driving At vehicle speeds above 31 mph 50 km h HDC will no longer function If the HDC Indicator Light begins to flash this indicates that the brakes are get
39. seal conditioners compressor oil or refrigerants Body Lubrication Locks and all body pivot points including such items as seat tracks door hinge pivot points and rollers liftgate tailgate sliding doors and hood hinges should be lubri cated periodically with a lithium based grease such as MOPAR Spray White Lube or equivalent to assure quiet easy operation and to protect against rust and wear Prior to the application of any lubricant the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and erit after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed Particular attention should also be given to hood latching components to ensure proper function When performing other underhood services the hood latch release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year preferably in the Fall and Spring Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant such as MOPAR Lock Cylinder Lubricant or equivalent directly into the lock cylinder Windshield Wiper Blades Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner or use the washer solvent This will remove accumulations of salt waxes or road film and help reduce streaking and smearing 394 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades Al
40. steam coming from under the hood do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator is hot Coolant Checks Check engine coolant antifreeze protection every 12 months before the onset of freezing weather where applicable If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty or rusty in appearance the system should be drained flushed and refilled with fresh engine coolant anti freeze Check the front of the A C condenser for any accumulation of bugs leaves etc If dirty clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rub ber cracking tears cuts and tightness of the connection at the bottle and radiator Inspect the entire system for leaks Cooling System Drain Flush And Refill Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for the proper maintenance intervals If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty or contains a considerable amount of sediment clean and flush with a reliable cooling system cleaner Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals Properly dispose of old engine coolant antifreeze 398 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Selection Of Coolant CAUTION Continued Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this e Do not use water alone or alcohol based engine section for the correct fluid
41. step 2 INFO Button Press the INFO button for an RDS station one with call letters displayed The radio will return a Radio Text message broadcast from an FM station FM mode only RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in AM FM or Satellite if equipped frequencies TUNE Control Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 211 Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid range tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the left or right t
42. the RKE transmitter LOCK button is pressed This feature may be selected with or without the Flash Lights with Lock feature Press and hold the EVIC button when in this display until ON or OFF appears to make your selection Headlamp Off Delay When this feature is selected the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle Press and hold the EVIC button when in this display until 0 30 60 or 90 appears to make your selection Key Off Power Delay When this feature is selected the power window switches radio uconnect phone power sunroof and NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 205 power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch has been tumed OFF Opening a vehicle door will cancel this feature Press and hold the EVIC button when in this display until OFF 45 sec 5 min or 10 min appears to make your selection Illuminated Approach When this feature is selected the headlights will activate and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked using the RKE transmitter Press and hold the EVIC button when in this display until OFF 30 sec 60 sec or 90 sec appears to make your selection Hill Start Assist HSA If Equipped When on is selected the HSA system is active Refer to HSA Hill Start Assist under Electronic Brake Control System in Section 5 of this manual fo
43. the TPMS will update automatically and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information Premium System If Equipped The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure lev els Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver module NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of your tires regularly and to maintain the proper pressure The TPMS consists of the following components e Receiver Module e Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors e Three Trigger Modules mounted in three of the four wheel wells e Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Messages which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC e Yellow Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will illumi nate in the instrument cluster and an audible chime will be activated when one or more of the four active road tire pressures are low The audible chime will sound once ee STARTING AND OPERATING 341 every ignition cycle for each condition that it detects In addition the EVI
44. the liftgate trim panel includes an opening with a snap in cap that provides access to release the latch in the event of an electrical system malfunction WARNING e Driving with the liftgate open can allow poison ous exhaust gases into your vehicle You and your passengers could be injured by these fumes Keep the liftgate closed when you are operating the 022206147 vehicle Opening The Liftgate If you are required to drive with the liftgate open NOTE make sure that all windows are closed and the e In the event of a power malfunction or the RKE climate control blower switch is set at high speed transmitter is inoperative insert the key into the DO NOT use the recirculation mode liftgate lock cylinder and turn to the right manual lock models only Using the liftgate handle pull the liftgate open with one fluid motion 36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id Gas props support the liftgate in the open position However because the gas pressure drops with tempera ture it may be necessary to assist the props when opening the liftgate in cold weather OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems Three point lap and shoulder belts for all seating positions Advanced Front Airbags for driver and front passen ger Supplemental Rear Impact Active Head Restraints AHR located on top of the front seats integrated into the head restraint S
45. tires prior to reducing the pressure CAUTION Reduced tire pressures may cause tire unseating and total loss of air pressure To reduce the risk of tire unseating while at a reduced tire pressure reduce your speed and avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers 296 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id Hill Climbing Hill climbing requires good judgment and a good under standing of your abilities and your vehicle s limitations Hills can cause serious problems Some are just too steep to climb and should not be attempted You should always feel confident with the vehicle and your abilities You should always climb hills straight up and down Never attempt to climb a hill on an angle Before Climbing A Steep Hill As you approach a hill consider its grade or steepness Determine if it is too steep Look to see what the traction is on the hill side trail Is the trail straight up and down What is on top and the other side Are there ruts rocks branches or other obstacles on the path Can you safely recover the vehicle if something goes wrong If every thing looks good and you feel confident then you should use low L Off Road with the 4WD LOCK engaged and proceed with caution maintaining your momentum as you climb the hill Driving Up Hill Once you have determined your ability to proceed and have shifted into the appropriate gear line your vehicle up for the straightest possible run Accelerate with an easy constant throttle a
46. uconnect phone Features Language Selection To change the language that the uconnect phone is using e Press the amp button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say the name of the language you wish to switch to English Espanol or Francais e Continue to follow the system prompts to complete the language selection After selecting one of the languages all prompts and voice commands will be in that language NOTE After every uconnect phone language change operation only the language specific 32 name phone book is usable The paired phone name is not language specific and usable across all languages Emergency Assistance If you are in an emergency and the cellular phone is reachable e Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency number for your area If the phone is not reachable and the uconnect phone is operational you may reach the emergency number as follows e Press the button to begin 106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Your phone must be turned on and paired to the uconnect phone to allow use of this vehicle feature e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Emergency and the uconnect phone will instruct the paired cellular phone to call the emergency num ber This feature is supported in the U S Canada and Mexico NOTE e The emergency number dialed is based on the country where the vehicle is purc
47. 258 GODE ie ee apo RS PERI IO IE E dep 166 415 OKP Ee DID S29 SAORE DERE PME HORE oe 166 Storage Vehicle 470 INDEX NEE Id ic PICCING Er 376 DUM Kool shoes tb oS oh ee as ee Ses 158 DUE Vicor PXIGHSION ara sai 44 ore cages Eed god 92 Supplemental Restraint System Airbag 54 5 vate Engine ON 2 2a it xe dci Rm deve 389 Syst m Remote Starting susce qoe sw EER RS 24 TACROMEIT MP 187 TOUCH epee N wes ee Cee ee OE Ves 419 Temperature Control Automatic ATC 265 Temperature Gauge Engine Coolant 190 366 Tether Anchor Child Restraint 75 Theft Alarm Security Alarm as soo sei ER dee 18 Theft System Security Alarm 18 Tie Down Hooks Cargo uie ak ae de dtr oo is 172 Tilt Steering COMMON lt 4 sasaa s eo ox wee ER 147 Tire and Loading Information Placard 322 Tire Identification Number TIN 321 Tue Mail ES 4 eeieEEEP T eR KERR eae d 318 Tire Safety Information v EER ERR AS 318 Un M RSA SARA pee ee Re ee ae es 82 326 453 ner Lile ol TIS 4044 Rek a Bure SEED ee as 332 Air Pressure suse dons x ox 4E E bx RD 326 Chains SERE sr ee ee 605 EA OE RARR 333 ONSE si oo os er 08a nye E EED Pare RES 368 oi Pact pale EERW aoe ERROR DES N 829 Flat Chanting use 544 Shee abet aad A des t 373 General Information SS SS SS 326 Ee s Dm 329 Inflation Pressures sie 444 EED dew 96 ee 327 Jac uus 4A RAAS REIS OE HER OAR 368 Life of Tires ww co lt ao ae o
48. 6 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle e The following table shows examples on how to calcu late total load cargo luggage and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle e For the following example the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs 392 kg STARTING AND OPERATING 325 Occupants Combined weight of AVAILABLE TOTAL FRONT REAR occupants and cargo MINUS Combined Occupant s Cargo Luggage and from Tire Placard weight Trailer Tongue Weight Occupant 1 200 Ibs EXAMPLE 1 Occupant 2 130 Da Occupant 3 160 Ibs 865 Ibs a ad od 195 Ibs EXAMPLE 2 Occupant 1 210 ibs Occupant 2 180 tos Occupant 3 150 ibs TOTAL WEIGHT 540 ibs 540 Ibs 325 Ibs EXAMPLE 3 Occupant 1 200 Ibs Occupant 2 200 tbs TOTAL WEIGHT 400 ibs 865 Ibs 400 Ibs 465 Ibs 811a4d11 326 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id WARNING Safety WARNING Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause accidents Under inflation increases tire flexing and can re sult in over heating and tire failure Over inflation reduces a tire s ability
49. ASSIST SYSTEM 2 0 WEL DESCENT WAR PAY ie ALL WHEEL PARURE Of ANTHLOCK DRIVE WRAKING IPM AWD 4WD BRAKE BRAKE SYSTEM FOUR WHET WARNING PAIRING BRAKE TOW HAUL WARMING Tow ML 4 LOW HAZARN FOUR WHEEL DEE LOW A C ame ELECTRO C CES CONTROL OFF 010507683 INTRODUCTION 7 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS a This Owner s Manual contains WARNINGS against op erating procedures that could result in an accident or bodily injury It also contains CAUTIONS against proce dures that could result in damage to your vehicle If you do not read this entire manual you may miss important information Observe all Warnings and Cautions VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The Vehicle Identification Number VIN is found on the left front corner of the instrument panel visible through N the windshield This number also appears on the vehicle registration and title Vehicle Identification Number 8 INTRODUCTION NN Id VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS ALTERATIONS WARNING Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to an accident resulting in serious injury or death THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS HA Word About Your Keys 12 O Ignition Key Removal 12 B Locking Doors With A Key 15 H Key In Ignition Reminder 15 W Sentry GE EE EE OR Ry 15 E Replacement K
50. AWD vehicles must be towed on a flatbed truck all four wheels off the ground e FWD vehicles can be towed with the front wheels elevated e FWD or AWD vehicles can be towed on a flatbed truck all wheels off the ground All Transaxles CAUTION If it is necessary to use the accessories while being towed 6 wipers defrosters etc the key must be in the ON position not the ACC position Make certain the trans mission remains in NEUTRAL DO NOT flat tow any vehicle equipped with an automatic transmission Damage to the drivetrain will result 378 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES NN Id CAUTION e If the vehicle being towed requires steering the ignition switch must be in the ACC position not in the LOCK position Do not attempt to use sling type equipment when towing When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck do not attach to front or rear suspension components Damage to your vehicle may result from improper towing Without The Ignition Key Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed with the ignition in the LOCK position A dolly should be used under the front wheels if the rear wheels are raised Proper towing equipment is necessary to prevent dam age to the vehicle Battery power is required to release the brake transmis sion interlock system automatic transmission only There is a removable plug in the right side of the shift lever housing that allows you to insert your finger to over
51. And Air Conditioning 261 IP eties RARR OE SE EO ER eye oS 258 O Automatic Temperature Control ATC aRadio Operio 4 4525 5sesn See pisita 259 es EO EE IT a OCD Player 0 eee cece eee eee EA a S EE zd BCD DVD Maintenance 259 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 183 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES a2 G amp G 82 11 9 9 5 CO 6 040107732 Air Outlet 5 Storage Bin 9 Heated Seat Switch If Equipped 2 Demisters 6 Glove Compartment 10 Hazard Warning Flasher 3 Instrument Cluster 7 Climate Controls 11 ESC OFF Switch If Equipped 4 Radio 8 Power Outlet 12 Heated Seat Switch If Equipped 184 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT CLUSTER MU 80 F FM 101 9 P10 040307743 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS 1 Fuel GaugelFuel Door Reminder When the ignition switch is in the ON position A the pointer will show the level of fuel remain ing in the fuel tank The fuel pump symbol points to the side of the vehicle where the fuel door is located 2 Charging System Light This light shows the status of the electrical charg ing system The light should come on when the ignition switch is first turned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light stays on or comes on while driving turn off some of the vehicle s non essential electrical devices or increase engine speed if at idle If the charging system light r
52. Control Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid range tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be se lected Many radio stations do not currently broadcast Music Type infor
53. Delete Erase All uconnect Phonebook Entries 3 Note that only the phonebook entry in the current language is deleted Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited Press the amp button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Erase All The uconnect phone will ask you to verify that you wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook After confirmation the phonebook entries will be deleted Note that only the phonebook in the current language is deleted Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited 102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M List All Names in the uconnect Phonebook e Press the amp button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook List Names e The uconnect phone will play the names of all the phonebook entries including the downloaded phone book entries if available e To call one of the names in the list press the m button during the playing of the desired name and say Call NOTE The user can also exercise Edit or Delete operations at this point e The uconnect phone will then prompt you as to the number designation you wish to call e The selected number will be dialed Phone Call Features The following features can be accessed through the uconnect phone if the feature s are available on your cellular service plan For example
54. EQUIPPED This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and liftgate or activate the Panic Alarm from distances up to approximately 66 ft 20 m using a hand held Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter The RKE transmitter does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system 8163e6a8 Three Button RKE Transmitter NOTE The line of transmission must not be blocked with metal objects To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter once to unlock the driver s door or twice within five seconds to unlock all doors and liftgate The 20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal The illuminated entry system will also turn on Remote Key Unlock Driver Door All First Press This feature lets you program the system to unlock either the driver s door or all doors on the first press of the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter To change the current setting proceed as follows e For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle In formation Center EVIC refer to RKE Unlock under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Fea tures under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following steps 1 Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed RKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds but no longer than 10 se
55. Lo UIE as ee ee RAD de Low Tire Pressure Change Oil Oil Change Required NOTE If the vehicle is equipped with the optional Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in the in strument cluster warnings such as Door Ajar and Gate Ajar will be displayed in the EVIC display For additional information refer to Electronic Vehicle Infor mation Center If Equipped in this section gASCAP If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged a gASCAP message will display in the odometer display area Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the TRIP ODOMETER button to turn off the message If the problem continues the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started Lo tIrE When tire pressure is low the odometer display will toggle between Lo and tIrE for three cycles CHAngE OIL Message Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system The CHAngE OIL message will flash in the instrument cluster odometer for approximately 12 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style Unless reset this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position To turn off the m
56. NN id persists the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started This might indicate a damaged cap I the problem is detected twice in a row the system will turn on the MIL Resolving the problem will turn the MIL light off EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS In some localities it may be a legal reguirement to pass an inspection of your vehicle s emissions control system Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration KO nance I M this check verifies the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is functioning and is not on when the engine is running and that the OBD II system is ready for testing For states that require an Inspection and Mainte Normally the OBD II system will be ready The OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently serviced recently had a dead battery or a battery replace ment If the OBD II system should be determined not ready for the I M test your vehicle may fail the test Your vehicle has a simple ignition key actuated test which you can use prior to going to the test station To check if your vehicle s OBD II system is ready you must do the following 1 Insert your ignition key into the ignition switch 2 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position but do not crank or start the engine 3 If you crank or start the engine you will have to start this test over 4 As soon as you turn the ignition switch to the ON position you will see t
57. O Prepare For The Appointment 447 APrepare His 4444 fevered apne ade aes 447 o Be Reasonable With Requests 447 N If You Need Assistance 447 O Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center 448 O Chrysler Canada Inc Customer Center 448 Hn Medco Contactes 2a x Ee xc rates VO 448 D Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDD TTY O Service Contract cnn lll Warranty Information U S Vehicles Only E MOPAR Parts ll Reporting Safety Defects O In The 50 United States And Washington D C O In Canada N Publication Order Forms 450 446 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE NN Id lll Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire O Tra lion Grades 24i bos ce md tarit ri 453 Quality eur P M 453 oO Treadwear 4 met be eae Oe DES SES SE Re 453 Temperate Grades si sin oath ewe REDE 454 N F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 447 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE Prepare For The Appointment If you re having warranty work done be sure to have the right papers with you Take your warranty folder All work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty Discuss additional charges with the service manager Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle s service history This can often provide a clue to the current problem Prepare A List Make a written list of your vehicle s problems or the specific work you want done If you ve had
58. Power piceriae Elid au opui e erej erp5 eds 423 Power Transfer Unit siese dn heme ther RR 406 Pregnant Women and Seat BENS os 9 mew sas 54 Preparation for Jacking sie soas HER 50h 4 oases i 369 Pretensioners beat Dells padarai R thee ER eee HEER 48 Programmable Electronic Features 203 Radial Py Ties oie od Ee ee KORE tere hoes 929 Radio Operation uosesuiera sie REA VERA EE 260 Radio Satellite uconnect studios 259 Rear Axle Differential less 406 Rear Drive Assembly asesor ees P RERO 406 Kear Liftgate sedan aces site tered edendo d oe 34 Rear Seat PORE uisus RE dox Re ac xpo e oA 195 Rear Window Defroster 2000 175 Rear Window Features less 174 Rear Viper lief ae scusa och Sabre PE DE 174 Recreational TOWING 22 823 is eR SR REP 364 ROITIBCDSBE ETA TT Sua NUS E ENTE 393 Reminder Seat Belt llle 52 Remote Control Door LOCKS 24 to4 cee eke bs a eee eee 19 SECUN ALO ee aaa a E RR Doe SEE 18 Remote Keyless Entry Sedan 19 Remote Sound System Radio Controls 258 Remote Starline Systemi ss onse eas ate Sah eee 24 Replacement Bulbs issie p EE ee RES 415 Replacement Keys Replacement Parts 468 INDEX NEE ttd qc Replacement Wiles xcpee taies t ROLE Y 9 d k Reporting Safety Defects u s o sore m aeo Pe deba Restraint Head ees esed dau dor UR ween Restraints Child eese Restraints Infant
59. Service Remote Keyless Entry uefuee waa ao RE ES 25 Transmitter Garage Door Opener Homel ink 151 dia orde a 42 YxS dS OS US MERE HE Di Tread Wear Indicators SS SE Es se Tap Odontelei REDES ROLE DE EE aes PES Trip Odometer Reset Button 472 INDEX NEE id Tum ai oi 4 444 458 934922 N ees 141 186 419 UC CONDECION iis rna deo 34949439319 EEE 248 uconnect Hands Free Phone 92 Understanding Your Instrument Panel 183 Uniform Tire Quality Grades 453 Universal Consumer Interface UCI Connector 248 Universal Transmitter 0004 151 Unleaded Gasoline 00002 e 344 Namity MATOS 4 64 ads tee OE eaten et oa aan dee d 92 Variance COMpasS acce d don ERA FOE E HEES EN 206 Vehicle Certification Label 9 Vehicle Identification Number VIN 7 Vehicle LOAGiING sere 44 500 04 0492446 323 350 352 Vehicle Modifications Alterations 8 Vedle DOr EE uos s 8 2 RARE he PERE OE 270 415 Vehicle Theft Alarm Security Alarm 18 Voice Recognition System VR 120 Warning Lights Instrument Cluster Description 185 Vois Kol ONE sie SR EE AAR SS E a PU Warnings and Cautions se Ee EE Ee Ee se 7 Warranty Intormanom sisie 440 a Pura ste eed ds 450 Washer Adding FIG sos ase EER EERDER DE 394 Washers Windshield i22 zm e e465 145 Washing Vehiele see oe ede he ee oh etna RA EDE 407 Wate
60. To fold the front passenger seat lift the recliner handle to Do not place anything on the seat that insulates the full upward position and push the seatback forward against heat such as a blanket or cushion This until it rests on the seat cushion may cause the seat heater to overheat Sitting in a seat that has been overheated could cause serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat CAUTION Repeated overheating of the seat could damage the heating element and or degrade the material of the seat 030907664 Fold Flat Front Passenger Seat Handle SN 030908886 3 AMAAN Front Passenger Seat Folded Flat Adjusting Active Head Restraints Active Head Restraints can reduce the risk of injury in the event of a rear impact The Active Head Restraint should be adjusted so the top of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear 132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME Val 030907652 Adjusted Head Restraint To raise the head restraint pull upward on the head restraint on some models you may need to press the push button To lower the head restraint press the push button located at the base of the head restraint and push downward on the head restraint N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133 dem 030907490 Push Button For comfort the Active Head Restraints can be tilted forward and backward To tilt the head restraint closer to the back of your he
61. You must consider this as part of the load on your vehicle Frontal Area The frontal area is the maximum height and maximum width of the front of a trailer Trailer Sway Control The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable friction associated with the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling Weight Carrying Hitch A weight carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of the vehicle These kind of hitches are the most popular on the market today and they are commonly used to tow small and medium sized trailers Weight Distributing Hitch A weight distributing system works by applying lever age through spring load bars They are typically used for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle s front axle and the trailer axle s When used in accordance with the manufacturers directions it provides for a more level ride offering more consistent steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 355 safety The addition of a friction hydraulic sway control also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability Trailer sway control and a weight distributing load egualizing h
62. a rollover crash an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt Always buckle up HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section contains the information you desire Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items of equipment ordered certain descriptions and illustrations may differ from your vehicle s equipment The detailed index at the back of this Owner s Manual contains a complete listing of all subjects Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this Owner s Manual 6 INTRODUCTION SR WATER IN FUEL Ou NM NM EXTERIOR BULB i B FUEL FELL SIDE Si der GO GLOW PLUG C MALt UC Mmcaroq H aar D S 2E C g mom S MASTER LGN Tg SwITCH Lh a a a t WA ROREM S DONE LIGHT On 500 REAR WINDOW EE RE Iy PARK LIGHTS DEFROST HEATED m gT ub WP pp DEFROST gare ev POWER WINDSHIELD WIFE MOE AAG AMD WASHER E s TRANS ENGINE COOLANT SUPPLEMENTAL ou TEMP WASSENGER TEMPERATURE RESTRAINT SYSTEM AMAAG OFF e 7 xd e 3 af REY ACTIVATE UPPER AMOLOWEN HEATED SEN POWER OUTLET AIM OUTLET OEFROST AND VCNTILATWG FAN WINDOW LOCK Qs ay amp og D l P Li dien TINE PRESSURE MONITOR TMACTION CONTWO SEE OWNERS MANUAL ot ELECTWONIC STABILITY ELECTRONIC PROGRAM BRAKE SPEED CONTROL
63. an accident or work done that is not on your maintenance log let the service advisor know Be Reasonable With Requests If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority At many authorized dealers you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge If you need a rental it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally interested in your satisfaction We want you to be happy with our products and services Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an authorized dealer They know your vehicle the best and are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality service The manufacturer s authorized dealers have the facilities factory trained technicians special tools and the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner 448 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE NN Id This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer s service manager first Most matters can be re solved with this process e If for some reason you are still not satisfied talk to the general manager or owner of the authorized dealer ship They want to know if you need assistance e If an authorized dealership is unable t
64. be evident by increased pedal travel during application and greater pedal force required to slow or stop In addition if the malfunction is caused by an internal leak as the brake fluid in the master cylinder drops the Brake Warning Light will light 306 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id WARNING WARNING e Pumping of the anti lock brakes will diminish their effectiveness and may lead to an accident Pumping makes the stopping distance longer Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of phys ics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase Driving a vehicle with the Brake Warning Light on is dangerous A significant decrease in braking per formance or vehicle stability during braking may occur It will take you longer to stop the vehicle or will make your vehicle harder to control You could have an accident Have the vehicle checked immedi ately braking or steering efficiency beyond that af Anti Lock Brake System ABS forded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and The ABS provides increased vehicle stability and brake tires or the traction afforded performance under most braking conditions The system The ABS cannot prevent accidents including automatically pumps the brakes during severe braking those resulting from excessive speed in turns conditions to prevent wheel lock up following another vehicle too closely or hyd
65. below the ADD or MIN mark e Check the windshield washer solvent and add if required M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 428 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES NN Id Once a Month At Each Oil Change e Check the tire pressure and look for unusual wear or e Change the engine oil filter damage e Inspect the brake hoses and lines e Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals as required e Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir brake CAUTION master cylinder and power steering add as needed A Failure to perform the required maintenance items e Check all lights and other electrical items for correct may result in damage to the vehicle operation e Check the manual transaxle fluid level Required Maintenance Intervals Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following pages for the required maintenance intervals M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 429 6 000 Miles 10 000 km or 12 000 Miles 20 000 km or 12 Months Maintenance Service 6 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter _J Rotate tires Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air c
66. by the use of non MOPAR parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer s warranty DEALER SERVICE Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person nel special tools and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner Service Manuals are available which include detailed service information for 386 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M your vehicle Refer to these manuals before attempting any procedure yourself NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems may void your warranty and could result in civil penalties being assessed against you WARNING You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Only do service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent me chanic MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES The pages that follow contain the required maintenance services determined by the engineers who designed your vehicle Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed maintenance schedule there are other components which may require servicing or replacement in the future CAUTION e Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or per form repairs and service when necessary could result in more costly repairs damage to other components or negatively impact vehicle perfor mance Immediately have potential malfunctions examined b
67. can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers or you can be thrown out of the vehicle Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver even on short trips Someone on the road may be a poor driver and cause a collision that includes you This can happen far away from home or on your own street Research has shown that seat belts save lives and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times Lap Shoulder Belts All the seats in your vehicle are equipped with Lap Shoulder belts The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during very sudden stops or collisions This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under 38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id normal conditions But in a collision the belt will lock WARNING Continued and reduce the risk of you striking the inside of the e Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous Seat vehicle or being thrown out belts are designed to go around the large bones of WARNING your body These are the strongest parts
68. center of the head restraint and attached to the tether anchor on the rear of the seatback Then tighten all three straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat Rear Seat Tether Anchors Not all child restraint systems will be installed as we have described here Again carefully follow the instruc tions that come with the child restraint system NOTE If your child restraint seat is not LATCH compatible install the restraint using the vehicle seat belts NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79 WARNING An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child Use only the anchor position directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap Transporting Pets Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts ENGINE BREAK IN RECOMMENDATIONS A long break in period is not required for the engine and drivetrain transmission and axle in your vehicle Drive moderately during the first 300 miles 500 km After the initial 60 miles 100 km speeds up to 50 or 55 mph 80 or 90 km h are desirable While cruising brief full throttle acceleration within the limits of lo
69. column or shift lever could result You must also press the brake pedal REVERSE This range is for moving the vehicle rearward Use this range only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop NEUTRAL This range is used when the vehicle is standing for prolonged periods with the engine running The engine may be started in this range Set the parking brake if you must leave the vehicle DRIVE This range is used for most city and highway driving AUTOSTICK IF EQUIPPED AutoStick is a driver interactive transmission that offers six manual ratio changes to provide you with more control AutoStick allows you to maximize engine brak ing eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts and improve overall vehicle performance This system can also provide you with more control during passing city driving cold slippery conditions mountain driving trailer towing and many other situations Automatic ratio changes upward will only occur to protect the Continuously Variable Automatic Transaxle CVT ee STARTING AND OPERATING 287 and or the engine from overspeed Changes down will AutoStick is deactivated only happen at minimum engine speed to prevent stall ing Operation NOTE AutoStick is not functional until the CVT warms up in cold weather AutoStick operation is activated in the DRIVE position by moving the shift lever side to side Moving the shift lever to the side will activate AutoStick and shif
70. current track or to the beginning of the previous track if it is within one second after the current track begins to play If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the second track three times it will play the third etc The button in the center of the left hand switch changes CD s on the 6 Disc in dash CD changer radio This button does not function for all other radios CD DVD MAINTENANCE To keep a CD DVD in good condition take the following precautions 1 Handle the disc by its edge avoid touching the surface 260 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id 2 If the disc is stained clean the surface with a soft cloth wiping from center to edge 3 Do not apply paper or tape to the disc avoid scratch ing the disc 4 Do not use solvents such as benzene thinner cleaners or anti static sprays 5 Store the disc in its case after playing 6 Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight 7 Do not store the disc where temperatures may become too high NOTE If you experience difficulty in playing a particu lar disc it may be damaged i e scratched reflective coating removed a hair moisture or dew on the disc oversized or have protection encoding Try a known good disc before considering disc player service RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES Under certain conditions the cellular phone being on in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio This condition may be le
71. designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 files use a 44 1 kHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rate NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 235 MPEG Sampling Be as Pit Rate bs 320 256 224 192 160 128 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 160 128 144 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 24 16 8 ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios MPEG 1 Audio Layer 3 48 44 1 32 MPEG 2 Audio Layer 3 24 22 05 16 Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported Playback of MP3 Files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading
72. engine coolant antifreeze is needed to maintain the proper level it should be added to the coolant bottle Do not overfill Points to Remember NOTE When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles kilometers of operation you may observe vapor coming from the front of the engine compartment This is nor mally a result of moisture from rain snow or high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor ized when the thermostat opens allowing hot engine coolant antifreeze to enter the radiator If an examination of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks the vehicle may be safely driven The vapor will soon dissipate e Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant recovery bottle If engine coolant anti freeze needs to be added the contents of the coolant recovery bottle must also be protected against freez ing If frequent engine coolant antifreeze additions are required or if the level in the coolant recovery bottle does not drop when the engine cools the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks Maintain engine coolant antifreeze concentration at 50 HOAT engine coolant antifreeze minimum and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum components Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed 402 M
73. front of the A C con denser located in front of the radiator for an accumula tion of dirt or insects Clean with a gentle water spray from behind the radiator and through the condenser Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser reducing air conditioning performance Mode Control Air Direction Rotate this control to choose from sev eral patterns of air distribution You can select either a primary mode as identified by the symbols on the con trol or a blend of two of these modes The closer the setting is to a particular symbol the more air distribution you receive from that mode 045607541 Panel 7 Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument panel These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow NOTE The center instrument panel outlets can be aimed so that they are directed toward the rear seat passengers for maximum airflow to the rear Bi Level ugh Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets NOTE For all settings except full cold or full hot there is a difference in temperature between the upper and lower outlets The warmer air flows to the floor outlets This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but cool conditions Floor Air is directed through the floor outlets with a small amount flowing through the defrost and side window demist outlets Mix Qe Air is directed through the floor defrost and side el window demist outlets This setting wo
74. if exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have a competent technician inspect the complete ex haust system and adjacent body areas for broken dam aged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for an oil change or lubrication Replace as required WARNING Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO refer to Exhaust Gas in the Safety Tips section of this manual ness of the catalyst as an emissions control device and may seriously reduce engine performance and cause serious damage to the engine Under normal operating conditions the catalytic con verter will not require maintenance However it is im portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage 396 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Sx Id CAUTION In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation a scorching odor may suggest severe Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your and abnormal catalyst overheating If this occurs stop vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition In the veh
75. ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position Insert the cigar lighter or accessory plug into the outlet for use To preserve the heating element do not hold the lighter in the heating position 162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE e To ensure proper operation a MOPAR knob and element must be used e Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts 13 Amps at 12 Volts If the 160 Watt 13 Amp power rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system will need to be replaced WARNING To avoid serious injury or death Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet Do not touch with wet hands Close the lid when not in use and while driving the vehicle If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric shock and failure CAUTION e Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use ie cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent the engine from starting Accessories that draw higher power i e coolers vacuum cleaners lights etc will degrade the battery even more quickly Only use these inter mittently and with great caution After the use of high power draw accessories or long periods of the vehicle not being started with accessories still plugged in the vehicle must be drive
76. in a higher power range This will allow you to cross over obstacles and descend hills with improved control and less effort NOTE For maximum off road performance premium fuel is recommended While the vehicle will operate on regular fuel when in L Off Road mode the engine has been calibrated for maximum performance using pre mium fuel Driving in Snow Mud and Sand There is a drastic reduction in traction when driving in snow mud or sand The vehicle will be less responsive to steering acceleration and braking inputs Therefore you should accelerate slowly leave greater stopping distances and avoid abrupt vehicle maneuvers You want to keep a slow constant steady pace The key is to maintain the vehicle s momentum Snow In heavy snow or for additional control and traction at slower speeds activate the 4WD LOCK and shift the transaxle to low L Off Road if necessary Do not shift to a lower gear than necessary to maintain headway Over revving the engine can spin the wheels and traction will be lost If you start to slow to a stop try turning your steering wheel no more than a 1 4 turn quickly back and forth while still applying throttle This will allow the tires to get a fresh bite and help maintain your momen tum CAUTION On icy or slippery roads do not downshift at high engine RPM s or vehicle speeds because engine brak ing may cause skidding and loss of control NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 295 Mu
77. in the event of an accident and could result in serious injury or death Active Head Restraints may be deployed if they are struck by an object such as a hand foot or loose cargo To avoid accidental deployment of the Ac tive Head Restraint ensure that all cargo is se cured as loose cargo could contact the Active Head Restraint during sudden stops Failure to follow this warning could cause personal injury if the Active Head Restraint is deployed 030906210 Folding Rear Seat 136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 030906211 Rear Seats Folded Flat To raise the seatback pull the strap forward and lift the seatback into its upright position WARNING Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into position If the seatback is not securely locked into position the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and or passengers An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury Reclining Rear Seat If Equipped For additional comfort pull the strap forward just enough to release the seatback latch Then push the seatback to a reclined position approximately 35 degrees maximum and release the strap N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137 WARNING TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD To open the hood two latches must be released e Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest In a collision you could slide under
78. in the interior trim but they will open during airbag deployment Airbag System Components The airbag system consists of the following e Occupant Restraint Controller ORC e Airbag Warning Light e Driver Front Airbag e Front Passenger Airbag e Supplemental Rear Impact Active Head Restraint for Driver and Front Passenger 56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains SABIC Supplemental Side Seat Airbags If Equipped Front and Side Impact Sensors Steering Wheel and Column Instrument Panel Knee Impact Bolster Front Seat Belt Pretensioners if equipped Advanced Front Airbag Features The Advanced Front Airbag system has multistage driver and front passenger airbags This system provides output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC which may receive information from the impact sensors at the front of the car The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an impact that requires airbag deployment The timing of the second stage determines whether the output force is low medium or high If a low output is sufficient to meet the need the remaining gas in the inflator is expended N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57 Supplemental Side Seat Airbags If Equipped Supplemental side seat airbags provide enhanced protec e No objects should be placed over or near the tion and
79. into the inner hood surface 031306201 N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139 LIGHTS Headlights and Parking Lights Multifunction Lever Turn the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent The multifunction lever controls the operation of the to turn on the parking lights headlights parking lights turn signals headlight beam Turn the end of the lever to the second detent to turn on selection instrument panel light dimming interior lights the headlights the passing lights and the fog lights The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the steering column 031407548 Headlight Control 031407547 Multifunction Lever 140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Lights On Reminder If the headlights or parking lights are left on after the ignition is turned OFF a chime will sound to alert the driver when the driver s door is opened Fog Lights If Equipped O The front fog light switch is on the multifunction lever To activate the front fog lights turn on the parking lights or the low beam headlights and pull out the end of the multifunction lever 031407550 Front Fog Lights Control NOTE The fog lights will only operate with the head lights on low beam Selecting high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141 Daytime Running Lights If Eduipped The high beam lights will come on as Daytime Run
80. is not functioning and that service is required However the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on If the ABS light is on the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti Lock brakes If the ABS light does not turn on when the Ignition switch is turned to the ON position have the light inspected by an authorized dealer UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 187 11 Seat Belt Reminder Light When the ignition switch is first turned ON this light will turn on for five to eight seconds as a bulb check During the bulb check if the driver s seat belt is unbuckled a chime will sound After the bulb check or when driving if the driver s seat belt remains unbuckled the Seat Belt Reminder Light will illuminate and the chime will sound Refer to Occupant Restraints in Section 2 for more information 12 Tachometer The white area of the scale shows the permissible engine revolutions per minute RPM x 1000 for each gear range Before reaching the red area ease up on the accelerator to prevent engine damage 13 Engine Temperature Warning Light E This light warns of an overheated engine condi see tion As temperatures rise and the gauge ap proaches H this indicator will illuminate and a 188 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN ed single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold Further overheating will cause
81. location may vary with the ra dio The individual buttons are described in the li Operation section The uconnect phone can be used with any Hands Free Profile certified Bluetooth cellular phone See the uconnect website for supported phones If your cellu lar phone supports a different profile e g Headset Profile you may not be able to use any uconnect phone features Refer to your cellular service provider or the phone manufacturer for details The uconnect phone is fully integrated with the vehi cle s audio system The volume of the uconnect phone can be adjusted either from the radio volume control knob or from the steering wheel radio control right switch if so equipped The radio display will be used for visual prompts from the uconnect phone such as CELL or caller ID on certain radios Operation Voice commands can be used to operate the uconnect phone and to navigate through the uconnect phone menu structure Voice commands are required after most uconnect phone prompts You will be prompted for a specific command and then guided through the available options e Prior to giving a voice command one must wait for the beep which follows the Ready prompt or another prompt e For certain operations compound commands can be used For example instead of saying Setup and then Phone Pairing the following compound command can be said Setup Phone Pairing N UNDERSTANDIN
82. mm 128 Security Alarm Theft Alarm suec d a 9 06 8 HE 18 Selection of Oil su esos Eee xr E HAD oe MEE 388 Sentry Key Immobilizer 3 eno RUE 15 Sentry Key Programming suas xo DoE KAR ino 17 Sentry Key Replacement 269 039 xs 16 Service Assistance ss EE EE ES eee eee 447 Serv Ce Co id ovedeacevaunever aoe eee dead 449 Service Manuals llle 451 elite Ae GIOCK oes wa RE EER oe 210 224 225 229 238 Set ngs Personal siss eae stn been KALE EE DER 203 Shift Speeds Manual Transaxle 282 Shoulder Delis sis asses uo ob ER red e doe 32 3 37 AdE ADAR as agar a a E DRS ER AE DEEP a 63 Side Window Demisters Defrosters 271 Dlehnals TU 2 220 9 4T Ts 82 186 419 Slippery Surfaces Driving ON 242 xen ERSER ES 289 Snow Chains Tire Chains LL 333 DOOW HESS 262 bee eee auyees EE OE A SUE 334 pare Due 2220399299029 099 9S 329 368 Specifications OTTERRETE TELTET EETTISET 388 Speed Control Cruise Control 148 191 POOE uuocscc neue ie BRAM OAR eau ACE 186 DIMEN ware x6 gee hoy SMS eee Bee b eee 278 Automatic Transmission 4 278 Engine Fails to Start sis o54 eo ee adheres 280 Manual Transmission 0vseedenetyceted 278 Ino cance eh oOo Oak Ose ao woe n oe 24 Diary Procedures aie ca beeen ore DERE 278 Steering POWER uuu pale eee eed UR Ree aes 301 302 DIECOlURHE resp SEE SR EER x RE E eu 147 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls 2 5 2 RR REE needs
83. monoxide a dan HomeLink Buttons gerous gas Do not run your vehicle in the garage NOTE HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Secu while training the transceiver Exhaust gas can rity Alarm is active cause serious injury or death 81cb44fe N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153 Programming HomeLink Before You Begin If you have not trained any of the HomeLink buttons erase all channels before you begin training To do this press and hold the two outside buttons for 20 seconds until the red indicator flashes It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the handheld transmitter of the device that is being copied to HomeLink for more efficient training and accurate transmission of the radio frequency signal Your vehicle should be parked outside of the garage when programming 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 2 Hold the battery side of the handheld transmitter away from the HomeLink button you wish to program Place the handheld transmitter 1 3 in 3 8 cm away from the HomeLink button you wish to program while keeping the indicator light in view 3 Simultaneously press and hold both the chosen HomeLink button and the handheld transmitter button until the HomeLink indicator changes from a slow to a rapidly blinking light then release both the HomeLink and handheld transmitter buttons Watch for the HomeLink indicator to change flash rates When it changes
84. of your body and can take the forces of a collision the best Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make your injuries in a collision much worse You might e It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seri ously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not eguipped with seats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Continued suffer internal injuries or you could even slide out of part of the belt Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your pas sengers safe too Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt People belted together can crash into one another in an accident hurting one another badly Never use a lap shoulder belt or lap belt for more than one person no matter what their size N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39 Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions 3 When the belt is long enough to fit insert the latch 1 Enter the vehicle and close the door Sit back and Plate into the buckle until you hear a click adjust the seat 2 The seat belt latch plate is along side the pillar near the back of your seat Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the belt to go around
85. parking brake should al ways be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle especially on an incline 80f7bc4b Shift Pattern 282 STARTING AND OPERATING Use each gear in numerical order do not skip a gear Be sure the transaxle is in first gear not third when starting from a standing position Damage to the clutch can result from starting in third gear For most city driving you will find it easier to use only the lower gears For steady highway driving with light accelerations fifth gear is recommended Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal and never try to hold the vehicle on a hill with the clutch pedal partially engaged This will cause abnormal wear on the clutch Never shift into REVERSE until the vehicle has come to a complete stop NOTE During cold weather until the transaxle lubri cant is warm you may experience slightly higher shift efforts This is normal and not harmful to the transaxle Recommended Shift Speeds To use your manual transaxle for optimal fuel economy it should be upshifted as listed in the following table Units in mph km h d end ae ad 1t02 2to3 3to4 4to5 eration Rate Engine Size All En gines Downshifting Proper downshifting will improve fuel economy and prolong engine life NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 283 CAUTION If you skip more than one gear while downshifting or downshift at too high a vehicle speed you could damage t
86. performance of the emissions engine and automatic transaxle control systems When these systems are oper ating properly your vehicle will provide excellent per formance and fuel economy as well as engine emissions well within current government regulations If any of these systems require service the OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs Al though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible CAUTION e Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause further damage to the emission control system It could also affect fuel economy and drivability The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be performed If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message After fuel is added the vehicle diagnostic system can determine if the fuel filler cap is possibly loose or improperly installed A gASCAP message will be dis played in the instrument cluster Tighten the gas cap until a clicking sound is heard This is an indication that the gas cap is properly tightened Press the trip odometer RESET button to turn off the message If the problem 384 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
87. protection between the load and the roof surface Continued 178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION Continued CAUTION Continued e Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners care e To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle do not exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity of 150 lbs 68 kg Always distribute heavy loads as evenly as possible and secure the load appropri ately Long loads which extend over the windshield such as wood panels or surfboards or loads with large frontal area should be secured to both the front and rear of the vehicle Continued fully when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof rack Wind forces due to natural causes or nearby truck traffic can add sudden upward lift to a load This is especially true on large flat loads and may result in damage to the cargo or your vehicle WARNING Cargo must be securely tied before driving your vehicle Improperly secured loads can fly off the vehicle particularly at high speeds resulting in per sonal injury or property damage Follow the roof rack cautions when carrying cargo on your roof rack UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CONTENTS la Instrument Panel Features B Instrument Cluster W Instrument Cluster Descriptions ll Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC I POQUID DEG 42464405055 eee ea oe gn et ou oes O Engine Oil Change Indicator System If Equipped D EVIC Func
88. radio Push the ON VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the ON VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it Voice Recognition System Radio If Equipped Refer to Voice Recognition System VR in Section 3 Voice Recognition Button uconnect phone If ru Equipped Press this button to operate the uconnect phone feature if equipped Refer to uconnect phone in Section 3 If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With UConnect message will display on the radio screen Phone Button uconnect phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the uconnect phone feature if equipped Refer to uconnect phone in Section 3 238 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature
89. radio and or on a premium display such as the instrument panel cluster and supported by your cellular phone the uconnect phone will provide notification to inform you of your phone and network status when you are attempting to make a phone call using uconnect phone The status is given for roaming network signal strength phone battery strength etc Dialing Using the Cellular Phone Keypad You can dial a phone number with your cellular phone keypad and still use the uconnect phone while dialing via the cellular phone keypad the user must exercise caution and take precautionary safety measures By dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth cellular phone the audio will be played through your vehicle s audio system The uconnect phone will work the same as if you dial the number using voice recognition NOTE Certain brands of cellular phones do not send the dial ring to the uconnect phone to play it on the vehicle audio system so you will not hear it Under this situation after successfully dialing a number the user may feel that the call did not go through even though the call is in progress Once your call is answered you will hear the audio Mute Un Mute Mute OFF When you mute the uconnect phone you will still be able to hear the conversation coming from the other party but the other party will not be able to hear you In order to mute the uconnect phone e Press the we button e Following the b
90. range Adding 1 at 1L of oil when the reading is at the low end of the indicated range will result in the oil level at the full end of the indicator range 388 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION Do not overfill the engine Overfilling the engine as indicated by the range markings as described above on the engine oil dipstick will cause oil aeration which can lead to loss of oil pressure and an increase in oil temperature This could damage your engine Change Engine Oil The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance Refer to Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 of this manual for information on this system NOTE Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 6 000 miles 10 000 km or six months whichever occurs first Engine Oil Selection For best performance and maximum protection for all engines under all types of operating conditions the manufacturer recommends engine oils that are API Cer tified and meet the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 American Petroleum Institute API Engine Oil Identification Symbol This symbol means that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute API The manufacturer only recommends API Certified engine oils N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 389 CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the chemicals can damage your engine Such da
91. road dirt wash with a mild soap solution fol lowed by rinsing Do not use abrasive cleaning components solvents steel wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 411 Glass Surfaces All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with MOPAR Glass Cleaner or any commercial household type glass cleaner Never use an abrasive type cleaner Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win dow equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear quarter window equipped with the radio antenna Do not use scrapers or other sharp instruments which may scratch the elements When cleaning the rearview mirror spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror Instrument Panel Cover The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface which minimizes reflections on the windshield Do not use protectants or other products which may cause undesir able reflections Use soap and warm water to restore the low glare surface Instrument Panel Bezels CAUTION When installing hanging air fresheners in your ve hicle read the installation instructions carefully Some air fresheners will damage the finish of painted or decorated parts if allowed to directly contact any surface Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic When cleaning the lenses care must be taken
92. system is operating satisfactorily The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera ture when driving in hot weather up mountain grades or when towing a trailer It should not be allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 191 CAUTION Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage your vehicle If temperature gauge reads H pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on the H and you hear continuous chimes turn the engine off immediately and call an authorized deal ership for service WARNING A hot engine cooling system is dangerous You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant You may want to call an authorized dealer ship for service if your vehicle overheats If you decide to look under the hood yourself see Section 7 of this manual Follow the warnings under the Cool ing System Pressure Cap paragraph 18 Cruise Indicator If Equipped CRUISE Tris indicator shows that the Electronic Speed Control System is ON 19 4WD Indicator Light This light indicates the vehicle is in 4WD Locked mode 20 Shift Lever Indicator The Shift Lever Indicator is self contained within the instrument cluster It displays the gear position of the automatic transmission NOTE You must apply the brakes befor
93. that you wish to edit e When prompted recite the new phone number for the phonebook entry that you are editing After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in the phonebook call the number you just edited or return to the main menu Phonebook Edit can be used to add another phone number to a name entry that already exists in the phonebook For example the entry John Doe may have a cellular and a home number but you can add John Doe s work number later using the Phonebook Edit feature N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101 Delete uconnect Phonebook Entry NOTE Editing phonebook entries is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion Press the button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Delete After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu you will then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish to delete You can either say the name of a phonebook entry that you wish to delete or you can say List Names to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook from which you choose To select one of the entries from the list press the 4 button while the uconnect phone is playing the desired entry and say Delete After you enter the name the uconnect phone will ask you which designation you wish to delete home work cellular pager or all Say the designation you wish to delete
94. the ing either separately or in combination can cause material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and heat buildup and possible tire failure excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A repre sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law INDEX 456 INDEX NEE Id ABS Anti Lock Brake System 306 Adding Engine Coolant Antifreeze 398 demo UC 23 ash pers HEN BEREID HS 348 Adding Washer Fluid i2 me ode ien Res Be s 394 Additives Fuel 423 9d he ee EE Ee aes 346 Air Cleaner Engine Engine Air Cleaner Filter 390 Air Conditioner Maintenance 392 AF CONCINOMING uade ipee node e ERR 444 44 261 Air Conditioning Controls vacetarstieeoic es 261 Air Conditioning Filter s 26 64 20 eR ori t 4944 271 Air Conditioning Operating Tips 272 Air Conditioning Refrigerant 392 393 Air Conditioning System 261 265 392 Air Pressure Tires 0 000000 eee 327 ur A P 54 64 Airbag Deployment au vo ease o xr BEE detta mdi 65 PDAS Light wis O55 95 58 oe Rs 55 62 68 81 186 Airbag Waintenanee os was oase Ee ee DES RR EES 67 ADAT OE P 57 61 63 64 Airbag Window Side Curtain 58 61
95. the ON position and may stay on for as long as three seconds 4WD 198 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M When lit solid There is an 4WD system fault 4WD performance will be at a reduced level Service the 4WD system soon When blinking The 4WD system is temporarily dis abled due to overload condition 31 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Display If Eguipped When the appropriate conditions exist this display shows the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC messages For more information refer to Electronic Vehicle Infor mation Center EVIC in this section of the manual 32 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Button If Equipped Pushing this button will change the display to the choices available for EVIC ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER EVIC IF EQUIPPED The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC fea tures a driver interactive display that is located in the instrument cluster gu nu Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC 041006717 NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 199 The EVIC consists of the following e Left Front Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime e System status e Left Rear Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime e Vehicle information warning message displays e Right Front Turn Signal Light Out with a single e Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features ome e Right Rear Turn Signal Light Out wi
96. the 3rd week 01 Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured two digits 01 means the year 2001 Prior to July 2000 tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured Example 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991 322 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id Tire Loading and Tire Pressure This placard tells you important information about the 1 number of people that can be carried in the vehicle Tire Placard Location NOTE The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed 2 total ight hicl on the driver s side B Pillar total weight your vehicle can carry 3 tire size designed for your vehicle Tire and Loading Information Placard 4 cold tire inflation pressures for the front rear and spare tires 2 3 INFLATION PRES 200kPa 29PSI SEE OWNER S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION an AN 1 09768 811b5a9a Tire and Loading Information Placard NS TA TING AND OPERATING 323 Loading The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle You will not exceed the tire s load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions tire size and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard and in the Vehicle Loading section of this manual NOTE Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition gross axle weight ratings GAWRs fo
97. the arrow pointing down ward is displayed 4 To move the minute forward touch the screen where the word Min with the arrow pointing upward is displayed To move the minute backward touch the screen where the word Min with the arrow pointing downward is displayed 5 To save the new time setting touch the screen where the word Save is displayed Changing Daylight Savings Time When selected this feature will display the time of day in daylight savings time Proceed as follows to change the current setting 1 Turn on the radio 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 When this feature is on a check mark will appear in the box next to the words Daylight Savings Touch the screen where the words Daylight Savings are dis played to change the current setting N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 225 Show Time if Radio is Off When selected this feature will display the time of day on the touch screen when the radio is turned off Proceed as follows to change the current setting 1 Turn on the radio 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 When this feature is on a check mark will appear in the box next to the words Show Time if Radio is Off Touch the screen where the words Show Time if Radio is Off are displayed to change the current setting Chan
98. the driver and all passengers NOTE Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds to the load on your vehicle Also additional factory installed options or authorized dealer installed options must be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard in the Tire Safety Information section of this manual for the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo for your vehicle Towing Requirements To promote proper break in of your vehicle drivetrain components the following guidelines are recommended CAUTION e Avoid towing a trailer for the first 500 miles 805 km of vehicle operation Doing so may dam age your vehicle e During the first 500 miles 805 km of trailer towing limit your speed to 50 mph 80 km h 358 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id Perform the maintenance listed in the Maintenance Schedule Refer to Section 8 of this manual When WARNING Continued towing a trailer never exceed the GAWR or GCWR When hauling cargo or towing a trailer do not ratings overload your vehicle or trailer Overloading can cause a loss of control poor performance or dam WARNING age to brakes axle engine transmission steering Improper towing can lead to an injury accident suspension chassis structure or tires Safety chains must always be used between your Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as possible
99. the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic system A leak in either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has dropped below a specified level The light will remain on until the cause is corrected N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 189 NOTE The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneuvers which change fluid level condi tions The vehicle should have service performed and the brake fluid level checked If brake failure is indicated immediate repair is neces sary WARNING Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is dangerous Part of the brake system may have failed It will take longer to stop the vehicle You could have an accident Have the vehicle checked immediately Vehicles equipped with the Anti Lock Brake System ABS are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD In the event of an EBD failure the Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light Immediate repair to the ABS system is required Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON position The light should illuminate for approxi mately two seconds The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected If the light does not illuminate have the light inspected by an authorized d
100. the phone and network and not the uconnect phone e Echo at the phone far end can sometimes be reduced by lowering the in vehicle audio volume e In a convertible vehicle system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down Bluetooth Communication Link Cellular phones have been found to lose connection to the uconnect phone When this happens the connec tion can generally be reestablished by switching the phone off on Your cellular phone is recommended to remain in Bluetooth ON mode Power Up After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the ON or ACC position or after a language change you must wait at least five seconds prior to using the system UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115 Voice Tree Main Menu Towing English uconnect Francais Last Enter Number Number on Phone is redialed See Phonebook Flowchart See Setup Flowchart The 32 name language specific phonebook will be used The phones paired are available across all languages Number associated with entry is dialed Number is Dialed Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 030607515 116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Voice Tree Phonebook Phonebook Enter Name Enter Name Entries Listed one Enter Name ist Confirmation at a time Enter Location Current Number is played Enter Location Enter Number New Entry
101. the seat belt and be seriously or even fatally injured Use the recliner only with the vehicle is parked It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area 1 Pull the hood release lever located on the left kick panel inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seri ously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure that everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly 031306200 Hood Release Lever 138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN ed 2 Move the safety catch located under the front edge of CAUTION the hood near the center and raise the hood To prevent possible damage do not slam the hood to close it Lower the hood until it is open approxi mately 8 in 20 cm and then drop it This should secure both latches Never drive your vehicle unless the hood is fully closed with both latches engaged WARNING Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your vehicle If the hood is not fully latched it could open when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision Failure to follow this warning could result in serious Safety Catch injury or death Lift the hood prop rod clipped to the right side left side facing hood of the engine compartment to secure the hood in the open position Place the hood prop at the location stamped
102. the switch in the forward position Again any release of the switch will stop the movement and the sunroof will remain in a partial close condition until the switch is pushed and held forward again To ensure sunroof is fully closed press and hold switch until sunroof has completely stopped moving Express Mode Press the switch forward and release and the sunroof will close automatically from any position The sunroof will close fully and stop automatically this is called Express Close During Express Close operation any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof Pinch Protect Feature This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the sunroof during Express Close operation If an ob struction in the path of the sunroof is detected the sunroof will automatically retract Remove obstruction and press the switch forward and release to Express Close 160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id Pinch Protect Override If a known obstruction ice debris etc prevents closing press the switch forward and hold for two seconds after the reversal occurs This allows the sunroof to move towards the close position NOTE Pinch protection is disabled while the switch is pressed Venting Sunroof Express Press and hold the Vent button and the sunroof will open to the vent position This is called Express Vent and will occur regardless of the sunroof position During Express Vent ope
103. there is a call on hold it will become the new active call If the active call is terminated by the phone far end a call on hold may not become active automatically This is cell phone dependent To bring the call back from hold press and hold the amp button until you hear a single beep Redial e Press the amp button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Redial e The uconnect phone will call the last number that was dialed from your cellular phone NOTE This may not be the last number dialed from the uconnect phone Call Continuation Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the uconnect phone after the vehicle ignition key has been switched to OFF Call continuation functionality avail able on the vehicle can be any one of three types e After the ignition key is switched to OFF a call can continue on the uconnect phone either until the call ends or until the vehicle battery condition dictates cessation of the call on the uconnect phone and transfer of the call to the cellular phone N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105 e After the ignition key is switched to OFF a call can continue on the uconnect phone for a certain dura tion after which the call is automatically transferred from the uconnect phone to the cellular phone e An active call is automatically transferred to the cellu lar phone after the ignition key is switched to OFF
104. type coolant antifreeze products Do not use addi CAUTION tional rust inhibitors or antirust products as they may not be compatible with the radiator engine e Mixing of engine coolant antifreeze other than specified Hybrid Organic Additive Technology HOAT engine coolant antifreeze may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion pro tection If a non HOAT engine coolant antifreeze is introduced into the cooling system in an emer gency it should be replaced with the specified Adding Coolant engine coolant antifreeze as soon as possible Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine Continued coolant antifreeze that allows extended maintenance intervals This engine coolant antifreeze can be used up to five years or 102 000 miles 170 000 km before replacement To prevent reducing this extended mainte nance period it is important that you use the same engine coolant antifreeze throughout the life of your coolant and may plug the radiator e This vehicle has not been designed for use with Propylene Glycol based engine coolant anti freeze Use of Propylene Glycol based engine coolant antifreeze is not recommended N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 399 vehicle Please review these recommendations for using Hybrid Organic Additive Technology HOAT engine coolant antifreeze When adding engine coolant antifreeze a minimum solution of 50 recommended MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 Y
105. when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157 Troubleshooting Tips If you are having trouble programming HomeLink here are some of the most common solutions e Replace the battery in the original transmitter e Press the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener to complete the training for a Rolling Code e Did you unplug the device for training and remember to plug it back in If you have any problems or require assistance please call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for information or assistance General Information This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry Canada RSS 210 Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation NOTE The transmitter has been tested and it complies with FCC and IC rules Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compli ance could void the user s authority to operate the device The term IC before the certification registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifica tions were met 158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M POWER SUNROOF IF EGUIPPED WARNING The power sunroof switch is located in the reading light e Never leave children in
106. work together with supplemental Side Airbag airbag on the instrument panel because any such Inflatable Curtains SABIC to help protect an occupant objects could cause harm if the vehicle is ina crash during a side impact The supplemental side seat airbag severe enough to cause the airbag to inflate is marked with an airbag label sewn into the outboard Do not put anything on or around the airbag covers Side of the seat or attempt to open them manually You may dam age the airbags and you could be injured because the airbags may no longer be functional The protective covers for the airbag cushions are de signed to open only when the airbags are inflating Do not drill cut or tamper with the knee bolster in any way Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster such as alarm lights stereos citizen band radios etc 022607296 Supplemental Side Seat Airbag Label 58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE When the bag deploys it opens the seam between the front and side of the seat s trim cover Each bag deploys independently that is a left side impact deploys the left bag only and a right side impact deploys only the right bag Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain SABIC SABIC airbags offer side impact and vehicle rollover protection to front and rear seat outboard occupants in addition to that provided by the body structure Each airbag features inflated chambers placed adjacent to the head of each ou
107. you need it Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with either an Automatic Locking Retractor ALR or a cinching latch plate or both Both types of seatbelts are designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip The ALR will make a ratcheting noise if you extract the entire belt from the retractor and then allow the belt to retract into the retractor For additional information on ALR refer to Automatic Locking Mode in this section e Buckle the child into the seat according to the child restraint manufacturer s directions e When your child restraint is not in use secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle Do not leave it loose in the vehicle In a sudden stop or collision it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury e To install a child restraint first pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to route it through the belt path of the child restraint and slide the latch plate into the buckle Next extract all the seat belt webbing out of the retractor and then allow the belt to retract into the retractor Finally pull on any excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child restraint Any seat belt system will loosen with time so check the belt occasionally and pull it tig
108. your vehicle the driver s door B Pillar This includes driver passengers and cargo The total The label contains the following information muse Re le ley yeu ei ae GVWR e Name of manufacturer i Tire Size e Month and year of manufacture The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents l the actual tire size on your vehicle Replacement tires a A a VAR must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size 5 e Vehicle Identification Number VIN Rim Size e Type of Vehicle This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size listed e Month Day and Hour of Manufacture MDH Inflation Pressure Ihe bar code allows a computer scanner to read the This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for Vehicle Identification Number VIN P y all loading conditions 352 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id Curb Weight The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight of the vehicle with all fluids including vehicle fuel at full capacity conditions and with no occupants or cargo loaded into the vehicle The front and rear curb weight values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are added Overloading The load carrying components springs tires wheels etc of your vehicle will provide satisfactory service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR The best way to figure out the total weight of your vehicle is to weigh it when it is fu
109. your vehicle Undesirable system opera tion or sensor damage may result when using re placement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use tire sealant from a can or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result 23 OdometerlTrip Odometer This display indicates the total distance the vehicle has been driven NOTE U S Federal regulations require that upon trans fer of vehicle ownership the seller certify to the pur chaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven If your odometer needs to be repaired or serviced the repair technician should leave the odometer reading the same as it was before the repair or service If s he cannot do so then the odometer must be set at zero and a sticker must be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was before the repair or service It is a good idea for you to make a record of the odometer reading before the repair service so that you can be sure that it is properly reset or that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer must be reset at zero 194 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id Vehicle Odometer Messages When the appropriate conditions exist the following odometer messages will display onn ss iv Ede E AE RR RD Ee AE ER Red Door Ajar Pale ee ha ewe oe OE do en ed ee Gate Ajar BASEAD 542 aca BEE BREER RD OE oe Fuel Cap Fault
110. 121 If you ever wish to interrupt the system while it lists options press the we button listen for the beep and say your command Pressing the 4 button while the system is speaking is known as barging in The system will be interrupted and after the beep you can add or change commands This will become helpful once you start to learn the options NOTE At any time you can say the words Cancel Help or Main Menu These commands are universal and can be used from any menu All other commands can be used depending upon the active application For example if you are in the disc menu and you are listening to FM radio you can speak commands from the disc menu or from the FM radio menu When using this system you should speak clearly and at a normal speaking volume The system will best recognize your speech if the win dows are closed and the heater air conditioning fan is set to low At any point if the system does not recognize one of your commands you will be prompted to repeat it To hear the first available Menu press the t button and say Help or Main Menu Commands The Voice Recognition VR system understands two types of commands Universal commands are available at all times Local commands are available if the supported radio mode is active 122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Changing the Volume 1 Start a dialogue by pressing the 4 button 2 Sa
111. 123 United States Canada FUEL REQUIREMENTS Your vehicle is designed to meet all emis sion regulations and provide excellent fuel 8 economy when using high quality regular unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of s00diab6 87 The use of premium gasoline is not recommended as it will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these engines RECOMMENDED OCTANE RATING RM METHOD Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to your engine However continued heavy spark knock at high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is required Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting stalling and hesitations If you experience these symptoms try another brand of gasoline with the ap propriate octane rating for your engine before consider ing service for the vehicle Reformulated Gasoline Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as reformulated gasoline Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates and are specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gasolines Properly blended reformulated gasolines will provide excellent performance and durability of engine and fuel system components NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 345 Gasoline Oxygenate Blends Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy genates such as 10 ethanol MTBE and ETBE Oxygen ates ar
112. 175 Defroster Windshield 82 263 268 Delay Intermittent Wipers 145 Diagnostic System Onboard ss is EER m 383 Dimmer Switch Headlight x oss RE DR RE 142 Dipsticks FOW SEGNE ana uaa REED DEL HA RARR DE 302 Disposal Antifreeze Engine Coolant 400 Ense Cil syare redrei eea Pope tod ae hs 389 bond uc P r OX 27 Door Locks Automatic ze RE EE EGRE 28 Door Opener Garde 2 235 a m3 4 Ru YES 151 Be aa oi and ARE eec Sa Pd wey VES WE PSY 282 Driver s Seat Back D 2 uua trac d eornm does 128 IPod os Cr 292 Oi Pavement 4 404244 2 erbe Se EER BARE 293 Sup Be 293 On Slippery Surfaces unu eR x cee ba ROO 289 Through Flowing Rising or Shallow Standing Water 290 460 INDEX NEE Id Electric Remote Mirrors 5 446 244 KERSE EE SEE 89 Electrical Power Outlets 5 sid aoo sage d 161 Electronic Brake Control System 308 Anti Lock Brake System 00 308 Drake Assist SYSIEM uud kx ie kd hs aes 309 Electronic Roll Mitigation 310 Electronic Stability Program ss s oe AR SS ars 314 Traction Control Systemi 3 oreraea deter See restis 310 Electronic Speed Control Cruise Control 148 Electronic Stability Program ESP 314 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC 198 Emergency In Case of JACKIE 368 JUMP Darne euo teo tees bea ee eee 373 lo A oase ooh MAAR N AR ER a
113. 38 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES NN Id 102 000 Miles 170 000 km or 108 000 Miles 180 000 km or 108 Months Maintenance Service 102 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter 11 Change the engine oil and engine oil Rotate tires filter If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the J Rotate tires engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary I Flush and replace the engine coolant if Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary not done at 60 months Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 439 114 000 Miles 190 000 km or 114 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter _J Rotate tires M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 440 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M 120 000 Miles 200 000 k
114. 5 To move the minute forward touch the screen where the word Min with the arrow pointing upward is displayed Io move the minute backward touch the screen where the word Min with the arrow pointing downward is displayed 6 To save the new time setting touch the screen where the word Save is displayed Changing Daylight Savings Time When selected this feature will display the time of day in daylight savings time Proceed as follows to change the current setting 1 Turn on the radio 2 Touch the screen where User Clock is displayed the clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 When this feature is on a check mark will appear in the box next to the words Daylight Savings Touch the screen where the words Daylight Savings are dis played to change the current setting NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 227 Show Time if Radio is Off When selected this feature will display the time of day on the touch screen when the radio is turned off Proceed as follows to change the current setting 1 Turn on the radio 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed 3 Touch the screen where User Clock is displayed the clock setting menu will appear on the screen 4 When this feature is on a check mark will appear in the box next to the words Show Time if Radio is Off Touch the screen where the words Show Time if Radio is Off are displayed to change the current setting
115. 64 Alam LENE Pr oo G88 Soe Ges heed 190 Alarm System Security Alarm 2 ue 2004060060 Ho 18 Alterations Modifications Vehicle 8 Antenna Satellite Radio LL 255 Antifreeze Engine Coolant 398 421 422 CPA eeren a DE 421 DispOsal ses pu rinsi dope DEERE A deis 400 Anti Lock Brake System ABS lt 3 c lt edomesess 306 Anti Lock Warning Light 2r rn gem 187 Anti Theft Security Alarm Theft Alarm 18 Appearance Car ER KRY ye he eT es 407 Posistance TOWING osse sa sr rdi ra a on o ER den 106 Automatic Dimming Mirror iade 25 4 ES Re 88 Automatic Door Locks sess 28 30 Automatic Temperature Control ATC 265 Automatic Transaxle 12 278 283 367 404 Fluid Level Check ases ETOORXS 405 Interlock SIE saw koe E REBEL KORE AR DAE 284 N INDEX 457 OVES UIS cong cee GR ase here tena eee ee 367 Selection Of Lubricant s esp se a4 represi 404 SOI sies kake ee cee eee eae 285 Special Additives 4 64 ns debo oH ie ori di 405 PUROCHC esse an 9 us E a b Pe d Gas 286 loa AIC Va ee es 6 dure 390 Keyless Transmitter Replacement RKE 29 Bel Deal ov sc u wes Bea e heres Ya RON eens ee 81 Body Mechanism Lubrication 393 Ber il LOON os P 4 ei Gao DEE ee dod E URS 322 Brake Assist Systemi seeks SERE EER daw RA 309 Drake Find Pm 423 Die ke Fomine ooste tans RE ete n eee 303 Drake SIEN Gavan peaceseeannecap hanes 305 402 Anti Lock ABS l
116. AINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M e Keep the front of the radiator clean If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning keep the front of the condenser clean e Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter operation If replacement is ever necessary install ONLY the correct type thermostat Other designs may result in unsatisfactory engine coolant antifreeze per formance poor gas mileage and increased emissions Brake System In order to assure brake system performance all brake system components should be inspected periodically Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for the proper maintenance intervals WARNING Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly an accident Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures excessive lining wear and possible brake damage You would not have your full braking capacity in an emergency Brake Master Cylinder The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked when performing under hood services or immediately if the brake system warning light is on Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing the cap If necessary add fluid to bring the fluid level up to the requirements described on the brake fluid reservoir Fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear The brake fluid level should be checked N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 403 when the pads
117. Added 2nd Confirmation Entry Deleted Phonebook Cleared Enter New Number Entry is modified Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 81c6bf80 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117 Voice Tree Setup Setup Confirmation T Towin Toggle Pair List Phones New phone Select a language Confirmation will English Espanol Prompts temporarily or Francais on off Say 4 digit System Lists override en code ones acide Mu List Phones dd to be deleted p Enter Name of phone and follow prompts to complete pairing System System Lists confirms Phones Phone Deleted All Phones Deleted Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 030605540 118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Primar e O C G Voice Commands Primar call cancel confirmation prompts continue delete dial download edit emergenc English erase all Espanol Francais help home N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119 Voice Commands Primar language send 0000 o 0 000 list names list phones towing assistance a mute off new entr transfer call n uconnect Tutorial try again pair a phone voice training SO pager mobile N set up phone settings or phone phone pairing pairing work phonebook phone book yes previous record again o redial 120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEA
118. C will display a graphic of the pressure value s with the low tire s flashing EN BOR Gg EEN HEE IN EE N E NNEE ERN E N ALLEEL LLL PELL E ENE NEE BRR HEH NEE E NN NENEEEEEE B ENS N B ER TEN Ban su E EE N E B E EEA NEE NENEEEEEE TEE NEE EEN N BERNER N i E BRENNEN N INN E NENNEN N Ed HER HBRHNNERRR NEE MAN ma au B E EEE NEE EE E NEN MEE E E NENEEEEEE n ma ENS HEN EEENEEEN HED DED 81826bed Low Tire Pressure Display Should a low tire condition occur on any of the four active road tire s you should stop as soon as possible and inflate all tires that are flashing on the graphic display to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pres sure value The system will automatically update the graphic display of the pressure value s will stop flash ing and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Light will extin guish once the updated tire pressure s have been re ceived The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h to receive this information Check TPMS Message The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and remain on solid when a system fault is detected The system fault will also sound a chime The EVIC will display a CHECK TPM SYS TEM message for three seconds This text message is then followed by a graphic display with in place of 342 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id the pressure value s indicating which Tire Pressure Monitoring Se
119. CD icon will illuminate on the radio display If a CD does not go into the slot more than 1 0 in 2 5 cm a disc may already be loaded and must be ejected before a new disc can be loaded If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio ON the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc The display will show the track number and index time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start of track 1 NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 243 CAUTION If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 10 seconds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed e This CD player will accept 4 3 4 in 12 cm discs the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism Do not use adhesive labels These labels can peel NOTE Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF away and jam the player mechanism convertible or soft top models if equipped RES is a single CD player Do not attempt to insert SEEK Button ra a second CD if one is already loaded Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the Dual media disc types one side is a DVD the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning other side is a CD should not be used and they of the current selection or return to the beginning of the can cause damage to the player previ
120. Changing the Time Zone 1 Turn on the radio 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed 3 Touch the screen where User Clock is displayed the clock setting menu will appear on the screen 4 Touch the screen where the words Set Time Zone are displayed The time zone selection menu will appear on the screen 5 Select a time zone by touching the screen where your selection appears If you do not see a time zone that you want to select touch the screen where the word Page is displayed to view additional time zones in the menu 6 Touch the screen where the word Save is displayed 228 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN SALES CODE RES AM FM STEREO RADIO WITH CD PLAYER MP3 AUX JACK Ca JE LE DISC RES Radio 042305232 Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right position to operate the radio side of the radio faceplate mE smout DE MP3 mm PUSH Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Push the ON VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio Push the ON VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the ON VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound w
121. D DVD CHANGER MP3 WMA AUX JACK NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of the radio faceplate T PUB AUDIO SELECT 042005200 REO Radio Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 209 Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Push the ON VOLUME control knob to tum on the radio Press the ON VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the ON VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned ON the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it SCAN Button Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next listenable station in AM FM or Satellite if equipped frequencies pausing for five seconds at each listenable station before continuing to the next To stop the search press the SCAN button a second time
122. DING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id To operate the flashlight press the switch once for high twice for low and a third time to return to off 81814415 Three Press Switch Cargo Cover The cargo area trim panels include two notches for mounting the available tonneau cover that accommo dates the reclining rear seat To install the Cargo Cover insert either end of the cover into one of the two notches located in the rear trim panels With one of the cover ends installed push inward on the opposite end and install it into the same notch location of the rear trim panel 035406965 Rear Trim Notches N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171 Using the handle pull the cover toward you and guide WARNING the rear cover posts into the guides located on both sides of the rear trim panel In an accident a cargo cover loose in the vehicle could cause injury It could fly around in a sudden stop and strike someone in the vehicle Do not store the cargo cover on the cargo floor or in the passenger compart ment Remove the cover from the vehicle when taken from its mounting Do not store in the vehicle 035406966 Cargo Cover Guides 172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Removable Load Floor Cargo Tie Down Loops The cargo area load floor is removable and can be There are four D rings installed in the cargo area for washed with mild soap and water securing cargo Cargo Load Floor
123. E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 443 150 000 Miles 250 000 km or 150 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter _J Rotate tires L Replace the engine air cleaner filter _J Replace the spark plugs L1 Adjust the parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer l8 444 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNE t This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer N to the owner but is not required to maintain emissions warranty WARNING e You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent mechanic Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance This could cause an accident OO omMCOMITOO mo2zrames IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE CONTENTS lll Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your pnr per hues Gas ERROR ETTET 447
124. Engine exhaust some of its constituents and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm In addi tion certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemi cals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm WARRANTY INFORMATION U S Vehicles Only See the Warranty Information Booklet located on the DVD for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle MOPAR PARTS MOPARS fluids lubricants parts and accessories are available from an authorized dealer They are recom mended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle operating at its best REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS In the 50 United States and Washington D C If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash or cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying the manufacturer N F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 451 If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your authorized dealer and the manufacturer To cont
125. G THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95 e For each feature explanation in this section only the combined form of the voice command is given You can also break the commands into parts and say each part of the command when you are asked for it For example you can use the combined form voice com mand Phonebook New Entry or you can break the combined form command into two voice commands Phonebook and New Entry Please remember the uconnect phone works best when you talk in a normal conversational tone as if speaking to someone sitting a few feet meters away from you Voice Command Tree Refer to Voice Tree in this section Help Command If you need assistance at any prompt or if you want to know your options at any prompt say Help following the beep The uconnect phone will play all the options at any prompt if you ask for help To activate the uconnect phone from idle simply press the amp button and follow the audible prompts for directions All uconnect phone sessions begin with a press of the amp button on the radio control head Cancel Command At any prompt after the beep you can say Cancel and you will be returned to the main menu However in a few instances the system will take you back to the previous menu Pair Link uconnect phone to a Cellular Phone To begin using your uconnect phone you must pair your compatible Bluetooth enabled cellular phone To complete the pairing pro
126. G YOUR VEHICLE 75 Automatic Locking Retractor ALR To operate the switchable retractor pull the belt from the retractor until there is enough allowance to pass it through the child restraint and slide the latch plate into the buckle Then pull on the belt until it is all removed from the retractor Allow the belt to return into the retractor pulling on the excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child restraint Follow the instruc tions of the child restraint manufacture NOTE To reset this feature you must let all of the belt webbing return into the retractor You will not be able to pull out more webbing until all of the webbing has been returned back into the retractor Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchor age system called LATCH which stands for Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren The LATCH system provides for the installation of the child restraint without using the vehicle seat belt All three rear seating positions have lower anchorages that are capable of accommodat ing LATCH compatible child seats having flexible webbing mounted lower attachments Child seats with fixed lower attachments must be installed in the out board positions only Regardless of the specific type of lower attachment NEVER install LATCH compatible child seats such that two seats share a common lower anchorage If you are installing LATCH compatible child restraints in
127. LINGS io a scope Rede rd IRR HRS ey ea 302 PIT AAR TCR T TESTES TETTE 422 Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts 422 FOC DERS 223 999 te eon Pe PER EU E 140 196 418 PONG edt Ded sos e556 AR enone db d 135 Folding Rear Seat Sedan so 3 5 de 4544445405 135 Four Wheel DIVE 425 eeege 309 9 bee Meas prts 288 EE M Geel ee ea RAL BREED oe Ge 288 Four Wheel Drive Operation 288 Freeing A Stick Velde ois ass AS iS Sands 376 Duel 2 2525 hah EE Eee ee EE 344 422 ld NG n oe ER eee owe aes sb eee EE oe 348 onini oa ee es a ee ee ee EDE 346 O e e 6 EE ess eee E MEER EX 421 eum i ae Sti ah Va RE PEDRO oo es 344 Fuller Cap Gas Cap seie esad iire FO OE 348 GASOlDE d P rw 344 fru P oe 185 lh Cr 186 Gone KANN rrr 344 Reguiremenls sa Ek oe ve nube OSes Gee es 344 lank Capacity sep dei R eika PER Pe EG 421 Ee yster Cado 4 4245 sit eti TETAI 349 Ign os EE 348 462 INDEX NEE Id EL MAREE TEL 65468450 4 92 5 4 3 5 412 Garage Door Opener HomeLink 151 Gas Cap Fuel Filler Cap sese 348 350 383 Gasoline Clean Air een 344 Gasoline Fuel xaxa ER AE RE d 49 344 421 Gasoline Reformulated 345 Gauges Coolant Ter Hettie nove du vae d v9 22423 190 lg rr 185 Odometer Dc 193 Tachometer 223x133 93 9 295 BAAR RARE LES ROS 187 ecc MMC 285 General Information 18 120 343 General Maintenance SS SS
128. N Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac turer s recommended fluid will cause belt slip and result in a complete transmission failure Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this sec tion for the correct fluid type NN MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 405 Fluid Level Check The fluid level in the automatic transaxle should be checked only by a trained technician Fluid And Filter Changes Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for the proper maintenance intervals Special Additives Do not add any materials other than leak detection dyes to Continuously Variable Transaxle CVT Fluid CVTF 4 CVTF 4 is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as the chemicals can damage your transmission compo nents Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Manual Transaxle If Equipped Lubricant Selection Use only the manufacturers recommended transmission fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section for the correct fluid type Fluid Level Check Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug The fluid level should be between the bottom of the fill hole and a point not more than 3 16 in 4 7 mm below the bottom of the hole Add fluid if necessary to maintain the proper level Frequency Of Fluid Change Under normal operatin
129. N Run Acc Dome Lt Blue Lamp Sunroof Rear Wiper Motor ACC Inverter 20 Amp CCN Power Locks ad 10 Amp IOD Feed Mod Wcm Yellow Interior Lighting Red 15 Amp Power Outlet ASD Relay Contact Lt Blue PWR Feed Yellow Yellow Feed 20 Amp Pwr Run Acc Outlet Yellow RR Dome Lamp Cigar Lt Blue Lighter 10 Amp IOD Feed Intrus Mod Red Siren If Equipped 10 Amp IGN RUN Heat AC Red Compass Sensor 414 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Cav Cartridge Mini Description Cav Cartridge Mini Description ity Fuse Fuse ity Fuse Fuse ENG ASD Control Feed 1 id EN jp ABS MODE 15 Amp ENG ASD Relay Feed 2 Red Conn PCM Lt Blue mM ABS Valve Feed 10 Amp IGN RUN Only ORC Red Feed NEN ABS Pump Feed 10Amp IGN RUN ORC OCM Red Feed Hot Car No Fuse Required RN Headlamp Washer Control Smart Glass If Equipped 20 Amp Heated Seat 25 Amp Diesel Fuel Heater Yellow If Equipped Natural If Equipped N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 415 CAUTION e When installing the IPM cover it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched Failure to do so may allow water to get into the IPM and possibly result in an electrical system failure When replacing a blown fuse it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system over load If a properly rated fuse continues to blow it indicate
130. NG NEE Id li Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS 335 oO Carbon Monoxide Warnings 348 O Base EER gui ok eo penne RU POP HA RI poo WAdding Hel ss ooo doni ed et RET ES 348 O Premium System If Equipped 340 O Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap 348 O General Information 4212 RR ER EE Xs 343 oO Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message 350 W Fuel Requirements sa aps SUP ES are us a 344 W Vehicle Loading sess 350 O Reformulated Gasoline issu 344 O Vehicle Certification Label 351 O Gasoline Oxygenate Blends 345 W Trailer Towing usse n KERR eR E ER 353 H E 85 Usage In Non Flex Fuel Vehicles 345 BG Common Towing Definitions 353 BE MM Ini Gasoline as dr ons na ER eot 346 D Trailer Hitch Classification 3555 o Materials Added To Fuel sasie si ms 346 O Trailer Towing Weights 3 Fuel System Cautions 347 Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings 356 A STARTING AND OPERATING 277 O Trailer And Tongue Weight 356 W Recreational Towing N EER N 357 Behind Motorhome Etc 0 364 BOWES N 362 H Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle Flat Towing With All Four Wheels On The CHOUNG 333539292 4 ooh Yd ee ee 3 364 278 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id STARTING PROCEDURES NOTE Before starting your vehicle adjust your seat adjust both e The engine will not start unless the clutch pedal is inside and ou
131. NG YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN MPEG Sampling Be as Pit Rate bs 320 256 224 192 160 128 Layer 3 112 96 80 64 56 48 160 128 144 112 96 80 64 ini e LM 24 22 05 16 7 56 48 Sampling Bit Rate kbps d Frequency KHz P MPEG 1 Audio 48 44 1 32 48 64 96 128 44 1 and 48 160 192 VBR ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for ID3 version 1 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported Playback of MP3 WMA Files When a medium containing MP3 WMA data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 WMA files Loading times for playback of MP3 WMA files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 221 LIST Button DISC Mode for MP3 WMA Play Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders on the disc
132. Open And Close The Hood sss 137 BE AN Shoes penne EE EA ud AE N 139 Boe HE Sarees SERE RR LAE de is O Multifunction Lever 00005 139 dc ee ee ee 125 o Headlights And Parking Lights 139 O Front Seat Adjustment 94x ms 126 5 Lights On Reminder sess 140 di oam PREIS Equipe es w O Manual Lumbar If Equipped 127 PERIODOS Tel eee Poe eae did O Driver s Seatback Recline 128 E oon Sere Ray AO MENG bos ie nSix Way Power Seats If Equipped 129 O Lane Change ASSIE oaa ea o R REK SOC d 142 EP Gest I OR MEN 130 Eien Low Beam Switch e vanuesoes e HR a 142 OFlash To Pass llle 142 o Fold Flat Front Passenger Seat lol N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 85 O Instrument Panel Dimming 142 El Map Reading Lights ss sy oe OP ee yeaa Di 143 N Windshield Wipers And Washers 144 o Windshield Wiper Operation 144 O Intermittent Wiper System 145 El Windshield Washers iei 624 s 145 ELSE Peale e dais Geet dang SOR SR 146 W Tilt Steering Column sas REPRE RAS 147 ll Electronic Speed Control If Equipped 148 TIO ACHV Ate uc ood HT EE ORE EER 149 H To Set a Desired Speed a a eere ced daa 149 ATED RT n 149 O To Resume Speed E To Vary The Speed Setting 3 222 x ee 149 H Manual Transaxle ios uoce ke xm e 150 o To Accelerate For Passing 151 ll Garage Door Opener If Equipped
133. Player MP3 AUX Jack And Sirius lc P aa 236 O Operating Instructions Radio Mode Zor D Operation Instructions CD Mode For CD And MP3 Audio Play onc s poe potat 4 aen d 242 O Notes On Playing MP3 Files O List Button CD Mode For MP3 Play 247 B Info Button CD Mode For MP3 Play 247 Bl Universal Consumer Interface UCI If EOUID DCCs PR RS HERE ak eee 248 E Connecting The iPod uou esas ademas 249 EL Using Ihis Feature aov RARI ES ea DE 249 D Controlling The iPod Using Radio DHDODS 44245 4040484545447 E E S 249 sie ie ASE IE EE EO eo ee 250 O List Or Browse Mode ss see 251 Equipped REN REQ RER RES REU Rbz Radios Only eee ap SURE EA ROES es EL Oy ster AGV sae tus 8 cae ass ae Y eoe a o Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID O Selecting uconnect studios Satellite Mode O Satellite Antenna a0 eco ER Eom O Reeepiion Quality iae oc rego ms O Operating Instructions uconnect studios Satellite Mode D Operating Instructions uconnect phone If Equipped NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 181 244 W uconnect studios Satellite Radio If 182 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id D Operating Instructions Video ll Radio Operation And Cellular Phones 260 ee N NN 258 ums Gone su ek wort P9 ce ge H 260 ll Remote Sound System Controls O Manual Heating
134. Restraint with Automatic Belts 73 Cold Salefy LOCKS os d eee A eed Ge ee RAE 31 Child Seat 23 6655 boise EE oes eA 77 Clean Ai Gasoline ERK ELE IR oe 344 Cleaning Wheels EE EE ee EO ee Se 409 Elise Onto ons sehen se dohe ee AR DRAERS 260 8 Ge RAAR AE a eee eR 210 224 225 229 238 CWC Shenae A eee ob ean ee ee QE GA eee 402 Clutch Thid soos eR xu EG nee E PESE 402 Com Holder es EE SAD KAR HEARD ee DA 168 Compact Disc CD Maintenance 259 Compact opare INE aeagesvaao du ege a caus 329 Compass VatlanEe 6464 06 ARE HR Oe eH SE 206 Connector WG pant ote OE eee ee EE EE eee 248 Universal Consumer Interface UCI 248 Console ie ER REPE Wed S Red 3 35 168 Contract Service ee ee 449 Coolant Antifreeze lll 421 422 Coole SIE 44444 ERES P DESI gud 397 Adding Coolant Antifreeze 2 22 s 398 Coolant Level oa casa ee bee ha 3G 397 400 N INDEX 459 Disposal of Used Coolant 400 Drain Flush and Refill 307 MisPCCHOW x12 3s aas UP EN WE REEDE e BEE 400 Points to Remember 399 401 laria Cap EP 999 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 398 Corrosion Protection ss aar 6465448 05 SEG 407 Cruise ill tenant ay Ouest an CRUS ED ae Ek 191 amp upioldels sed vera querere HER RD oes 168 Customer Assistance sn 447 Dealer Service 25 eaae aede 4 BERE EISH ES 385 Defroster Rear Window
135. S TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id The recommended replacement battery is CR2032 1 If the RKE transmitter is equipped with a screw remove the screw With the RKE transmitter buttons facing down use a flat blade to pry the two halves of the RKE transmitter apart Make sure not to damage the elastomer seal during removal DRR 7 Separating RKE Transmitter Halves 81182c72 2 Remove and replace the battery Avoid touching the new battery with your fingers Skin oils may cause battery deterioration If you touch a battery clean it with rubbing alcohol 3 To reassemble the RKE transmitter case snap the two halves together NOTE If the RKE transmitter is equipped with a screw reinstall and tighten the screw until snug REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry x2 RKE transmitter to start the engine conve niently from outside the vehicle while still maintaining security The system has a range of approximately 328 ft 100 m NOTE The vehicle must be equipped with an auto matic transmission to be equipped with Remote Start NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25 WARNING How to Use Remote Start All of the following conditions must be met before the engine will remote start e Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or confined area Exhaust gas contains Carbon Mon a Eis ts oxide CO which is odorless and colorless Car Doors cl
136. SO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of folder levels 8 N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 245 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders The radio display of file names and folder names is limited For large numbers of files and or folders the radio may be unable to display the file name and folder name and will assign a number instead With a maximum number of files exceeding 20 folders will result in this display With 200 files exceeding 50 folders will result in this display e Maximum number of characters in file folder names e Level 1 12 including a separator and a three character extension e Level 2 31 including a separator and a three character extension Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times Supported MP3 File Formats The radio will r
137. Service Contract You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer s service contracts If you purchased a manufacturer s service contract you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date If you have any questions about the service contract call the manufacturer s Service Contract National Customer Hot line at 1 800 521 9922 The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer s service contract It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer s service contract If you purchased a ser vice contract that is not a manufacturer s service contract and you require service after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires please refer to the contract documents and contact the person listed in those documents 450 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE NN Id We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased the vehicle An authorized dealer has also made a major investment in facilities tools and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with the ownership experience You ll be pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related concerns WARNING
138. Speed Control system maintains speed up and down hills A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal On steep hills a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed Control could lose control An accident could be the result Do not use Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding icy snow covered or slippery GARAGE DOOR OPENER IF EQUIPPED HomeLink replaces up to three remote controls hand held transmitters that operate devices such as garage door openers motorized gates lighting or home security systems The HomeLink unit operates off your vehicle s battery 152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Ne The HomeLink buttons that are located in the headliner WARNING or sun visor designate the three different HomeLink channels Your motorized door or gate will open and close while you are training the Universal Transceiver Do not train the transceiver if people pets or other objects are in the path of the door or gate Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener that has a stop and reverse feature as required by Federal safety standards This includes most garage door opener models manufactured after 1982 Do not use a garage door opener without these safety features Call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for safety infor mation or assistance Vehicle exhaust contains carbon
139. TRUMENT PANEL NN Id Compass Temperature Audio Press and release the EVIC button to display one of eight compass headings to indicate the direction the vehicle is facing the outside temperature and the current radio station For additional information regarding the compass refer to Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in this Section Average Fuel Economy Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset When the fuel economy is reset the display will read RESET or show dashes for two seconds Then the history information will be erased and the averaging will continue from the last fuel reading before the reset Distance To Empty DTE Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with the fuel remaining in the tank This estimated distance is determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous and average fuel economy according to the current fuel tank level This is not resettable NOTE Significant changes in driving style or vehicle loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of the vehicle regardless of the DTE displayed value When the DTE value is less than 30 miles 48 km estimated driving distance the DTE display will change to a text display of LOW FUEL This display will continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel Adding a significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the LOW FUEL text and a new DTE value will be dis played based on the current value
140. TURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the eguipment e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received in cluding interference that may cause undesired operation VOICE RECOGNITION VR SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED Voice Recognition VR System Operation e This Voice Recognition system allows you to control your AM FM radio satellite radio disc li player and a memo recorder NOTE Take care to speak into the Voice Interface System as calmly and normally as possible The ability of the Voice Interface System to recognize user voice com mands may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a raised voice level WARNING Any voice commanded system should be used only in safe driving conditions following local laws and phone use All attention should be kept on the roadway ahead Failure to do so may result in an accident causing serious injury or death When you press the button you will hear a beep The beep is your signal to give a command NOTE If you do not say a command within a few seconds the system will present you with a list of options N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
141. The default is set to High and under this setting dialogues will play at 11 db higher than if the setting is Normal Aspect Ratio If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose between wide screen pan scan and letter box AutoPlay If Equipped When this is set to On and a DVD video is inserted it will bypass the DVD menu screen and automatically play the movie In some rare cases the DVD player may not auto play the main title In such cases use the MENU button on the remote control to select desired title to play NOTE The user will have to set these defaults before loading a disc If changes are made to these settings after a disc is loaded changes will not be effective Also the defaults are effective only if the disc supports the customer preferred settings AM and FM Buttons Press the buttons to select AM or FM mode 216 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN SET Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but ton the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this excep
142. This system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions ESC cor rects for over steering or under steering of the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the over steering or under steering condi tion Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the desired path ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle When the actual path does not match the intended path ESC applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the over steer or under steer condition e Over steer when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position e Under steer when the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel position ESC Off Indicator Light The ESC Off Indicator Light located in the instrument cluster starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active The ESC Off Indicator Light also flashes when TCS is active If the ESC Off Indicator Light begins to flash during acceleration ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions ee OFF WARNING e The Electronic Stability Control ESC cannot pre vent the natural laws of physics from actin
143. VWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver passengers cargo and tongue weight The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR Gross Trailer Weight GTW The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo consumables and equipment permanent or tem porary loaded in or on the trailer in its loaded and ready for operation condition The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale The entire weight of the trailer must be supported by the scale Gross Combination Weight Rating GCWR The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination NOTE The GCWR rating includes a 150 lbs 68 kg allowance for the presence of a driver Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR 354 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id WARNING It is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded You could lose control of the vehicle and have an accident Tongue Weight TW The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer In most cases it should not be less than 10 or more than 15 of the trailer load
144. a esos a pu Boe sms 332 Load Capacity sessies RR RE 303 ere 922 029 Pressure Monitor System TPMS 335 Pressure Warning Licht sses ase ERK is 404 192 Qualy Grade seers RA RES PEE ADR 453 AGIAN enrera ET OE N AE EE N 329 Replacement creires irekter KORP S815 332 N INDEX 471 KOOL io EER oo 5685456 ES es EE 334 Dale su 8 SS opens rA IPSE ee ER es 318 326 2 Rc 319 HOW tikes P 334 pare MWe Vo dare Ai 8 oak hea DA ae 368 PIEKE Dm 330 Tread Wear Indicators nag aa IE ees eas n Bors 331 Tongue Weight Trailer Weight 356 lo A PC TT 353 24 Hour Towing Assistance 106 Disabled V RCE ip re ede cu ea US d 377 ton TP 356 Reeiesiondd D oo eee oot eee eee 364 lu PCM EE EER ET 356 TOWING ASSISE io AARD N Ee Bir wns eae oa 106 ie ee PRASA TEE ETIES ETE EE ee 269 Tier JOWO ooi bes MORA DER ES EE DE S 353 Cooling System Tips va RAS KORS AO PR 363 ele MASS Soap ae eda OER ae 355 Minimum Requirements ao dcm RR s 357 Trailer and Tongue Weight 356 MAII peere Hevea ue X acea Sarg dua d a es ool Trailer lowing Guide 1 32935 m ne dee es 356 aller Wel lit sae RE EER ban 2 ours 2 ok Cees 356 ie ae di hehe ah bbe oe ee eee ees BENS 283 Automati u s ao ee as oS ERA EOS 12 278 283 404 Autostick SS SS SS es 286 EE AE ew EE OO SUV es ves 14 278 281 pels On sqagaet REKE oa ek po Ores DE e 283 Suc PPP 286 Selection of Lubricant sv vate soe eR BARS 404 Transmitter Battery
145. a jarring and uncomfortable ride Tire Inflation Pressures The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver s side B Pillar Some vehicles may have Supplemental Tire Pressure Information for vehicle loads that are less than the maximum loaded vehicle condition These pressure con ditions will be found in the Supplemental Tire Pressure Information section of this manual The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least once a month Use a good quality pocket type gauge to check tire pressure Do not make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they are under inflated 328 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id CAUTION After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al ways reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the valve stem Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always cold tire inflation pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after a three hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla Hon pressure molded into the tire sidewall Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures as t
146. a vehicle with the key in the ignition switch Occupants particularly unat tended children can become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death In an accident there is a greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof You could also be seriously injured or killed Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are properly secured too Do not allow small children to operate the sun Power Sunroof Switch roof Never allow your fingers other body parts or any object to project through the sunroof opening Injury may result s y x J i eN pus d A a Til VENT AUTO v 034206938 N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159 Opening the Sunroof Manual Mode To open the sunroof press and hold the switch rearward to full open Any release of the switch will stop the movement and the sunroof will remain in a partial open condition until the switch is pushed and held rearward again Express Mode Press the switch rearward and release and the sunroof will open automatically from any position The sunroof will open fully and stop automatically this is called Express Open During Express Open operation any movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof Closing the Sunroof Manual Mode To close the sunroof press and hold
147. act NHTSA you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153 or go to http www safercar gov or write to Administrator NHTSA 1200 New Jersey Avenue SE West Building Washington D C 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http www safercar gov In Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect you should contact the Customer Service Department imme diately Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should write to Transport Canada Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls 2780 Sheffield Road Ottawa Ontario K1B 9V9 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS To order the following manuals you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below Visa Mas tercard American Express and Discover orders are ac cepted If you prefer mailing your payment please call for an order form NOTE A street address is required when ordering manuals no P O Boxes 452 e Service Manuals These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need in diagnosing troubleshooting problem solving maintaining servicing and repairing Chrysler Group LLC vehicles A complete working knowledge of the vehicle system and or components is written in straightforward language with illustrations diagrams and charts Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
148. ad pull outward on the bottom of the head restraint Push rearward on the bottom of the head restraint to move the head restraint away from your head Active Head Restraint Normal Position 022607494 134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e In the event of deployment of an Active Head Re straint refer to Resetting Active Head Restraints AHR under Occupant Restraints in Section 2 WARNING e Driving a vehicle with the head restraints removed or improperly adjusted could cause serious injury or death in the event of a collision The head dan restraints should always be checked prior to oper ating the vehicle and never adjusted while the 030907533 vehicle is in motion Always adjust the head restraints when the vehicle is in PARK EE Active Head Restraint Tilted NOTE Continued e The head restraints should only be removed by guali fied technicians for service purposes only If either of the head restraints require removal see your autho rized dealer NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135 WARNING Continued Folding Rear Seat To provide additional storage area each rear seatback can e Do not place items over the top of the Active Head be folded forward Pull the strap forward to move the Restraint such as coats seat covers or portable seat forward and flat DVD players These items may interfere with the operation of the Active Head Restraint
149. ad capacity N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177 The optional crossbars must also be secured in one of the seven detent positions marked with an arrow on the siderails to prevent movement To move the crossbars loosen the thumb screws located at the upper edge of each crossbar approximately eight turns then move the crossbar to the desired position keeping the crossbars parallel to the rack frame Once the crossbar is in one of the seven detent positions retighten the thumb screws to lock the crossbar into position NOTE e To help control wind noise when the crossbars are not in use place the front crossbar in the first detent from the front of the vehicle and the rear crossbar in the second detent from the rear of the vehicle e f the rear crossbar or any metallic object is placed over the satellite radio antenna if equipped you may experience interruption of satellite radio reception For improved satellite radio reception place the rear cross bar in the second detent from the rear of the vehicle when not in use e The grab handles on the back of the vehicle if equipped are not to be used as a towing feature CAUTION e To prevent damage to the roof of your vehicle DO NOT carry any loads on the roof rack without crossbars installed The load should be secured and placed on top of the crossbars not directly on the roof If it is necessary to place the load on the roof place a blanket or some other
150. ading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 431 30 000 Miles 50 000 km or 36 000 Miles 60 000 km or 36 Months Maintenance Service 30 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter 11 Change the engine oil and engine oil Rotate tires filter If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the J Rotate tires engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary 1 Replace the spark plugs Replace the air conditioning filter 1 Adjust the parking brake on vehicles Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for equipped with four wheel disc brakes damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 432 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M 42 000 Miles 70 000 km or 48 000 Miles 80 000 km or 48 Months Maintenance Service 42 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter E 11 Change the engine oil and engine oil I Rotate tires filter L1 If using your vehicl
151. adjacent rear seating positions you can use the LATCH anchors or the vehicle s seat belt for the outboard position but you must use the vehicle s seat belt at the center position If your child restraints are not 76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id LATCH compatible you can only install the child re straints using the vehicle s seat belts Please refer to Installing the Child Restraint System for typical installa tion instructions Rear Seat LATCH Child restraints systems having attachments designed to connect to the lower anchorages are now available Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for connection to the top tether anchorage have been available for some time In fact many child restraint manufacturers will provide add on tether strap kits for some of their older products Tether anchorage kits are also available for most older vehicles Because the lower anchorages are to be introduced to passenger carrying vehicles over a period of years child restraint systems having attachments for those anchor ages will continue to have features for installation in vehicles using the lap or lap shoulder belt They will also have tether straps and you are urged to take advantage of all of the available attachments provided with your child restraint in any vehicle NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77 NOTE When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint please ens
152. ailgating and other activities Rear Window Wiper Washer The rear wiper washer is controlled by a rotary switch located on the center portion of the control lever The control lever is located on the right side of the steering column Fold Down Speakers 031507505 Rear Wiper Washer Control Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the On position to activate the rear wiper MH NOTE The rear wiper operates in an intermittent mode only Rotate the center portion of the lever past the first detent to activate that rear washer The washer pump will continue to operate as long as the lever or ring is engaged Upon release the wipers will cycle two times before returning to the set position If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned OFF the wiper will automatically return to the park position if power accessory delay is active Power acces sory delay can be cancelled by opening the door if this happens the rear wiper will stop at its current position and will not go to park UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175 Rear Window Defroster The rear window defroster button is located on the bottom right side of the blower control knob Press this button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors if equipped An indica tor in the button will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on The rear window defroster automatically turns off afte
153. ainer absorbs moisture from the air resulting in a lower boiling point This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged braking resulting in sudden brake failure This could result in a accident Continued 404 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE NN id WARNING Continued e Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts causing the brake fluid to catch fire Brake fluid can also damage painted and vinyl surfaces care should be taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contami nate the brake fluid Brake seal components could be damaged causing partial or complete brake failure This could result in an accident CAUTION Use of improper brake fluids will affect overall clutch system performance Improper brake fluids may damage the clutch system resulting in loss of clutch function and the ability to shift the transaxle Automatic Transaxle CVT If Equipped Selection Of Lubricant It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the transaxle to assure optimum transaxle performance Use only the manufacturer s recommended transmission fluid which has been formulated with special metal to metal friction coefficient additives to provide the proper steel belt traction on the drive and driven pulleys Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section for the correct fluid type CAUTIO
154. air conditioning performance Blower Control For full automatic operation or for automatic blower operation turn the knob to AUTO position In manual mode there are seven blower speeds that can be individual selected In off 045607536 position the blower will shut off Manual Operation This system offers a full complement of manual override features which consist of Blower Preferred Automatic Mode Preferred Automatic or Blower and Mode Pre ferred Automatic This means the operator can override the blower the mode or both There is a manual blower range for times when the AUTO setting is not desired The blower can be set to any fixed blower speed by rotating the Blower Control knob on the left NOTE Please read the Automatic Temperature Control Operation Chart that follows for details Automatic Temperature Control Operation Operation How Blower Control Mode Control The system will Air Temperature Control Air Recirculation Control NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 267 A C Operation Full Automatic Operation Blower Preferred Automatic Set blower knob to Auto Sct mode knob to Auto Set temperature knobs for comfort Sel blower knob to any desired airflow level other than Auto Set mode knob to Auto Set temperature knobs for comfort Automatic User selectable to any speed Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic but can be overridden Automa
155. al Off mode is overcome turn ESC back on by momentarily pressing the ESC Off switch This may be done while the vehicle is in motion ee STARTING AND OPERATING 317 Full Off Four Wheel Drive Models Only This mode is intended for off highway or off road use when ESC stability features could inhibit vehicle maneu verability due to trail conditions This mode is entered by pressing and holding the ESC Off switch for five seconds when the vehicle is stopped and the engine is running After five seconds the ESC Off Indicator Light will illuminate and the ESC Off message will appear in the odometer Press and release the Trip Odometer button located on the instrument cluster to clear this message In this mode ESC is turned off until the vehicle reaches a speed of 35 mph 56 km h At 35 mph 56 km h the system returns to Partial Off mode as described above When the vehicle speed drops below 30 mph 48 km h the ESC system shuts off ESC is deactivated at low vehicle speeds so that it will not interfere with off road driving however ESC function returns to provide the stability feature at speeds above 35 mph 56 km h The ESC Off Indicator Light will always be illuminated when ESC is off To turn ESC on again momentarily press the ESC Off switch This will restore the ESC On mode of operation NOTE The ESC OFF message will display and an audible chime will sound when the shift l
156. ale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid In addition the EVIC will display a CHECK TPM SYSTEM message for three seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure values 4 For each subsequent ignition key cycle a chime will sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid and the EVIC will display a CHECK TPM SYS TEM message for three seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure values 5 Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare tire the TPMS will update automatically and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation 344 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the following licenses ET EE ERF EE EK KR55120123 2671 5120
157. anding water Driving through standing water limits your vehi cle s braking capabilities which increases stop ping distances Therefore after driving through standing water drive slowly and lightly press on the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes Getting water inside your vehicle s engine can cause it to lock up and stall out and leave you stranded Failure to follow these warnings may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you ON ROAD DRIVING TIPS Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance and a narrower track to make them capable of performing in a wide variety of off road applications Specific design characteristics give them a higher center of gravity than ordinary cars An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better view of the road allowing you to anticipate problems They are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as conventional two wheel drive vehicles any more than low slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfacto rily in off road conditions If at all possible avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers As with other vehicles of this type failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or vehicle rollover NS TA TING AND OPERATING 293 OFF ROAD DRIVING TIPS You will encounter many types of terrain driving off road You should be familiar with the terrain and area before proceeding There are many type
158. any trailer will increase your stopping dis tance When towing you should allow for additional space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you Failure to do so could result in an accident Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1 000 Ibs 454 kg and required for trailers in excess of 2 000 lbs 907 kg Towing Requirements Trailer Lights and Wiring Whenever you pull a trailer regardless of the trailer size stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for motoring safety The Trailer Tow Package may include a four and seven pin wiring harness Use a factory approved trailer har ness and connector NOTE Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles wiring harness The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector Refer to the following illustrations 1 Female Pins 2 Male Pin 3 Ground 9 779 O O QO Four Pin Connector 4 Park 5 Left Stop Turn 6 Right Stop Turn STARTING AND OPERATING 361 057003766 362 STARTING AND OPERATING rO O YY 057003765 Seven Pin Connector 5 Ground 6 Left Stop Turn 7 Running Lamps 1 Battery 2 Backup Lamps 3 Right Stop Turn 4 Electric Brakes Towing Tips Before setting out on a trip practice turning stopping and backing the trailer in an area away from heavy traffic Automatic Transaxle The auto
159. ard full Heated Mirrors If Equipped rearward and normal These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice This feature is activated whenever you turn on the rear window defroster Refer to Rear Window Features in this section for further information 92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN Id Vanity Mirrors If Equipped To use the mirror pull the sun visor down and rotate the mirror cover upward ee 030406199 Vanity Mirror Sun Visor Sliding Feature The sun visors may be pulled out to provide extended coverage of the side glass uconnect phone IF EQUIPPED uconnect phone is a voice activated hands free in vehicle communications system uconnect phone al lows you to dial a phone number with your cellular phone using simple voice commands e g Call Mike Work or Dial 248 555 1212 Your cellular phone s audio is transmitted through your vehicle s audio system the system will automatically mute your radio when using the uconnect phone NOTE The uconnect phone requires a cellular phone equipped with the Bluetooth Hands Free Profile Ver sion 0 96 or higher See the uconnect website for supported phones For uconnect customer support visit the following websites e www chrysler com uconnect e www dodge com uconnect E UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93 e www jeep com uconnect e or call 1 877 855 8400 uconnec
160. are replaced However low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed NOTE If your vehicle is equipped with a manual transaxle the brake fluid reservoir supplies fluid to both the brake system and the clutch release system The two systems are separated in the reservoir and a leak in one system will not affect the other system The manual transaxle clutch release system should not require fluid replacement during the life of the vehicle If the brake fluid reservoir is low and the brake system does not indicate any leaks or other problems it may be a result of a leak in the hydraulic clutch release system See your local authorized dealer for service Use only manufacturer s recommended brake fluid Re fer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section for the correct fluid type WARNING e Use only manufacturer s recommended brake fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section for the correct fluid type Using the wrong type of brake fluid can severely damage your brake system and or impair its per formance The proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is also labeled on the original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir To avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been in a tightly closed container Keep the master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times Brake fluid in a open cont
161. areas 035206217 Front Door Storage Rear Door Storage UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167 035206216 168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CONSOLE FEATURES To open the lower storage compartment lift upward on The floor console contains both an upper and lower the lower handle to unlatch the lower storage compart storage compartment ment and lift the lid open To open the upper storage compartment push inward on the upper handle to unlatch the upper lid and lift the lid open 035306220 035306219 2 NT Upper Storage Compartment NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169 WARNING Press in on the flashlight to release it Do not operate this vehicle with a console compart ment lid in the open position Cellular phones music players and other handheld electronic devices should be stowed while driving Use of these devices while driving can cause an accident due to distrac tion resulting in death or injury CARGO AREA FEATURES Cargo Light Removable Self Recharging Flashlight i The dual function light is mounted in the headliner Prides And Release above the cargo area to illuminate the cargo area and part of it snaps out of the bezel to serve as a flashlight when needed The flashlight features two bright LED light bulbs and is powered by rechargeable lithium batteries that recharge when snapped back into place for convenience 170 UNDERSTAN
162. ary spare tires are high pressure compact spares designed for temporary emergency use only NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 319 Tires designed to this standard have the letter T e High flotation tire sizing is based on U S design molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded tion Example T145 80D18 103M into the sidewall Example 31x10 5 R15 LT Tire Sizing Chart EXAMPLE P Passenger car tire size based on U S design standards blank Passenger car tire based on European design standards LT Light truck tire based on U S design standards T Temporary spare tire 31 Overall diameter in inches in 65 Aspect ratio in percent Ratio of section height to section width of tire 10 5 Section width in inches in R Construction code R means radial construction D means diagonal or bias construction 15 Rim diameter in inches in 320 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id EXAMPLE 95 Load Index A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carr H Speed Symbol A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions i e tire pressure vehicle loading road conditions and posted speed limits Load Identification
163. assemble or modify the system Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged i e bent retractor torn webbing etc If there is any question regarding belt or retractor condition replace the belt Airbag Warning Light The light should come on and remain on for six to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON If the light is not lit during starting see your authorized dealer If the light stays on flickers or comes on while driving have the system checked by an autho rized dealer 82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME Defroster Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed You should be able to feel the air directed against the windshield See your autho rized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside the Vehicle Tires Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear patterns Check for stones nails glass or other objects lodged in the tread Inspect the tread and sidewall for cuts and cracks Check the wheel nuts for tightness Check the tires including spare for proper pressure Lights Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights while you work the controls Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel Door Latches Che
164. at How to Use the Automatic Locking Mode 1 Buckle the combination lap shoulder belt 2 Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire belt is extracted 48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME 3 Allow the belt to retract As the belt retracts you will hear a clicking sound This indicates the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode How to Disengage the Automatic Locking Mode Disconnect the combination lap shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the Vehicle Sensitive Emer gency Locking mode Seat Belt Pretensioners If Equipped The driver and front passenger s seat belts are equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to auto matically remove any slack from the seat belts in the event of a collision These devices improve the perfor mance of the seat belt system by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant in a collision Pretensioners work for all size occupants including those in child restraints NOTE These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant The seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re straint Controller ORC refer to information on Airbags in this section Like the airbags the pretensioners are single use items After a collision that is severe enough to deploy the airbags and pre
165. atch plate and pull on the lap belt A snug belt internal injury in a collision The belt forces won t reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision be at the strong hip and pelvic bones but across your abdomen Always wear the lap belt as low as possible and keep it snug A twisted belt can t do its job as well In a collision it could even cut into you Be sure the belt is straight If you can t straighten a belt in your vehicle take it to your authorized dealer and have it fixed Y a Y ma N A a a T 5 Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is r ES comfortable and not resting on your neck The retractor BOE will withdraw any slack in the belt T 022607726 Positioning Lap Belt 42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id 6 To release the belt push the red button on the buckle The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position If necessary slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the belt to retract fully WARNING A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays or loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged bent retractor torn webbing etc Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage In the
166. ath Auto Down The driver s door window switch has an Auto Down feature Push the window switch past the first detent release and the window will go down automatically To cancel the Auto Down movement operate the switch in either the up or down direction and release the switch 34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id Window Lockout Switch The window lockout switch on the driver s door allows you to disable the window control on the other doors To disable the window controls on the other doors press the window LOCKOUT switch To enable the window con trols press the window LOCKOUT switch a second time 021906197 Window Lockout Switch LIFTGATE NOTE The key that is used to start the vehicle is also used to lock or unlock the doors and open the liftgate To unlock the liftgate insert the key into the lock and turn to the right manual lock models only The liftgate can also be unlocked using the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter or by activating the power door lock switches located on the front doors The central locking unlocking feature if equipped can also be activated from the liftgate key cylinder Once unlocked the liftgate can be opened or closed without using the key To open the liftgate squeeze the liftgate release and pull the liftgate open with one fluid motion THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35 e Although the liftgate has no inside release mechanism
167. available NOTE 1 A near deployment event occurs when the airbag sensor detects severe vehicle deceleration usually indica tive of a crash but not severe enough to warrant airbag deployment NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69 2 Under certain circumstances EDR data may not be recorded e g loss of battery power In conjunction with other data gathered during a com plete accident investigation the electronic data may be used by Chrysler Group LLC and others to learn more about the possible causes of crashes and associated injuries in order to assess and improve vehicle perfor mance In addition to crash investigations initiated by Chrysler Group LLC such investigations may be re quested by customers insurance carriers government officials and professional crash researchers such as those associated with universities and with hospital and insur ance organizations In the event that an investigation is undertaken by Chrysler Group LLC regardless of initiative the com pany or its designated representative will first obtain permission of the appropriate custodial entity for the vehicle usually the vehicle owner or lessee before accessing the electronic data stored unless ordered to download data by a court with legal jurisdiction ie pursuant to a warrant A copy of the data will be provided to the custodial entity upon request General data that does not identify particular vehicles or crashes m
168. available Pressing the INFO button again will close the INFO screen RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the direction of the arrows TUNE Control Rotary Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel MUSIC TYPE Button Except REU Radio Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be se lected Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music type By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type function is active the radio will be tuned to the next channel with the same selected Music Type name NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 257 If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel MUSIC TYPE Button REU Radio Pressing this button provides a Music Type list from which you can make a selection Once a selection is made you can seek up or down or scan the channels and the radio will tune to the next station matching the selected format There is no time out for this screen Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button again will close the Music Type screen Once closed seek up seek down and scan will no longer be ba
169. ay be released for incorporation in aggregate crash databases such as those maintained by the U S govern ment and various states Data of a potentially sensitive nature such as would identify a particular driver ve hicle or crash will be treated confidentially Confidential data will not be disclosed by Chrysler Group LLC to any third party except when 1 Used for research purposes such as to match data with a particular crash record in an aggregate database provided confidentiality of personal data is thereafter preserved 2 Used in defense of litigation involving a Chrysler Group LLC product 70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME 2 4 Requested by police under a legal warrant Otherwise required by law Data parameters that are recorded Diagnostic trouble code s and warning light status for electronically controlled safety systems including the airbag system Vehicle speed Engine RPM Brake switch status Pedal position And other parameters depending on vehicle configuration Child Restraint Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all times including babies and children Every state in the United States and all Canadian provinces reguire that small children ride in proper restraint systems This is the law and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it Children 12 years and younger should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat if available According to crash statistics chi
170. be aware of all safety warnings When it comes to service remember that your authorized dealer knows your vehicle best has factory trained tech nicians and genuine MOPAR parts and cares about your Satisfaction ROLLOVER WARNING Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles This vehicle has a higher ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than many passenger cars It is capable of performing better in a wide variety of off road applications Driven in an unsafe manner all vehicles can go out of control Because of the higher center of gravity if this vehicle is out of control it may roll over when some other vehicles may not Do not attempt sharp turns abrupt maneuvers or other unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle control Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result in an accident rollover of the vehicle and severe or fatal injury Drive carefully Ay WARNING HIGHER ROLLOVER RISK Avoid Abrupt Maneuvers and Excessive Speed Always Buckle Up See Owmer s Manual For Further Information 80bfe0f0 Rollover Warning Label Failure to use driver and passenger seat belts provided is a major cause of severe or fatal injury In fact the U S government notes that the universal use of existing seat INTRODUCTION 5 belts could cut the highway death toll by 10 000 or more each year and could reduce disabling injuries by two million annually In
171. buckle The belt will comfortable and not resting on your neck The retractor automatically retract to its stowed position If necessary will withdraw any slack in the belt N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47 slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the belt to retract fully Insert the mini latch plate into the slot provided in the trim panel Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap shoulder belt 1 Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor point 2 At about 6 to 12 in 15 to 30 cm above the latch plate grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate 3 Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the latch plate 4 Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the folded webbing Automatic Locking Retractors ALR Mode If Equipped In this mode the shoulder belt is automatically pre locked The belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt The Automatic Locking Mode is avail able on all passenger seating positions with a combina tion lap shoulder belt When to Use the Automatic Locking Mode Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child safety seat is installed in a passenger seating position Children 12 years old and younger should always ride buckled up in the rear se
172. cal traffic laws contributes to a good break in Wide open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri mental and should be avoided The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high quality energy conserving type lubricant Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions under which vehicle operations will occur The recommended viscosity and quality grades are shown in Engine Oil under Maintenance Procedures in section 7 of this manual NON DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS MUST NEVER BE USED A new engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles kilometers of operation This should be considered a normal part of the break in and not inter preted as an indication of difficulty 80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M SAFETY TIPS Exhaust Gas NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO WARNING AREA Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless WARNING e It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seri ously injured or killed Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO follow these safety tips Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area Do not allow
173. cess you will need to reference your cellular phone Owner s Manual The uconnect website may also provide detailed instructions for pairing 96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M The following are general phone to uconnect phone pairing instructions Press the amp button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing When prompted after the beep say Pair a Phone and follow the audible prompts You will be asked to say a four digit Personal Identi fication Number PIN which you will later need to enter into your cellular phone You can enter any four digit PIN You will not need to remember this PIN after the initial pairing process For identification purposes you will be prompted to give the uconnect phone a name for your cellular phone Each cellular phone that is paired should be given a unique phone name e You will then be asked to give your cellular phone a priority level between one and seven with one being the highest priority You can pair up to seven cellular phones to your uconnect phone However at any given time only one cellular phone can be in use connected to your uconnect phone The priority allows the uconnect phone to know which cellular phone to use if multiple cellular phones are in the vehicle at the same time For example if priority three and priority five phones are present in the vehicle the uconnect phone wi
174. chase the original owner is provided with a four digit Personal Identification Number PIN Keep the PIN in a secure location This number is required for authorized dealer replacement of keys Du plication of keys may be performed at an authorized dealer or by following the customer key programming procedure This procedure consists of programming a blank key to the vehicle electronics A blank key is one that has never been programmed NOTE When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System serviced bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized dealer N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17 Customer Key Programming If you have two valid Sentry Keys you can program new Sentry Keys to the system by performing the following procedure 1 Cut the additional Sentry Key Transponder blank s to match the ignition switch lock cylinder key code 2 Insert the first valid key into the ignition switch Turn the ignition switch to the ON position for at least three seconds but no longer than 15 seconds Then turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the first key 3 Insert the second valid key into the ignition switch Turn the ignition switch to the ON position within 15 seconds After 10 seconds a chime will sound In addition the Vehicle Security Light will begin to flash Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the second key 4 Insert a blank Sentry Key into the ignition switch
175. ck for positive closing latching and locking Fluid Leaks Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel engine coolant oil or other fluid leaks Also if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel power steering fluid or brake fluid leaks are suspected the cause should be located and corrected immediately UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS MOS ok AAS DEEG ER SU cee HR WA EE ss 87 O Sun Visor Sliding Feature 92 B Inside Day Night Mirror 87 W uconnect phone If Equipped 92 o Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped 88 HE Pete siewe DUS Put vat ear EE oe 94 E Power MIDIORS 2 paso 4 566 oo PCS 89 GPhone Call Features osse SR EER ears 102 o Outside Mirror Driver Side sse cut ts 90 Ouconnect phone Features 105 D Outside Mirror Passenger Side 90 H Advanced Phone Connectivity 110 O Folding Outside Mirrors 21 H Things You Should Know About Your 4 Heated Mirrors If Equipped 91 uconnec M PHONG 4 sas iere Ear acd ER RS T O General Information 225 2 s 4 4408 axes 120 O Vanity Mirrors If Equipped 92 84 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE E W Voice Recognition VR System O Adjusting Active Head Restraints 132 If Equipped nn A Folding Rear geat 4 cem PAM DE RARR ti 135 O Voice Recognition VR System Operation 120 ll To
176. cle with the engine running for an extended period of time If ADDING FUEL the vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine running for more than a short period Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap adjust the ventilation system to force fresh out side air into the vehicle The gas cap is behind the fuel filler door on the left side of the vehicle If the gas cap is lost or damaged be sure Continued the replacement cap is for use with this vehicle NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 349 After removing the gas cap place the gas cap tether cable over a hook on the inside of the fuel door This keeps the LE dad gas cap suspended away from and protects the vehicle s e Damage to the fuel system or emission control surface system could result from using an improper fuel tank filler cap gas cap A poorly fitting cap could let impurities into the fuel system e A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the Malfunc tion Indicator Light MIL to turn on e To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling do not top 5 off the fuel tank after filling WARNING e Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank filled Fuel Filler Door Continued 350 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id WARNING Continued e Never add fuel when the engine is running This is in violation of most state and Federal fire regula tions and may cause the MIL to turn on A fire may result if
177. clearing Recirculation will be disabled automatically if these modes are selected e Extended use of recirculation may cause the windows to fog If the interior of the windows begins to fog press the Recirculation button to return to outside air Some temp humidity conditions will cause captured interior air to condense on windows and hamper visibility For this reason the system will not allow Recirculation to be selected while in floor defrost or defrost floor mode Attempting to use the recircula tion while in these modes will cause the LED in the control button to blink and then turn off e Recirculation Control The system will automatically control recircu lation However pressing the Recirculation Control button will put the system in recircu lation mode This can be used when outside conditions such as smoke odors dust or high humidity are present Activating recirculation will cause the LED in the control button to illuminate 270 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN e Most of the time when in Automatic Operation you can temporarily put the system into Recirculation Mode by pressing the Recirculation button However under certain conditions while in Automatic Mode the system is blowing air out the defrost vents When these conditions are present and the Recirculation button is pressed the indicator will flash and then turn off This tells you that you are unable to go into Recirculation Mode at this time
178. conds Then press and hold the UNLOCK button while still holding the LOCK button 2 Release both buttons at the same time 3 Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press ing the LOCK UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter with the ignition switch in the LOCK position and the key removed 4 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter while you are inside the vehicle will activate the Vehicle Security Alarm Opening a door with the Vehicle Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm Illuminated Approach If Equipped This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21 equipped with the EVIC Refer to Illuminated Ap proach under Personal Settings Customer Program mable Features under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 To Lock The Doors And Liftgate Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter to lock all doors and liftgate The turn signal lights will flash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal Sound Horn With Remote Key Lock This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors are locked with the RKE tra
179. ctical to allow the Advanced Front Airbags room to inflate 4 Do not lean against the door If your vehicle has side airbags and deployment occurs the side airbags will inflate forcefully into the space between you and the door 5 If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be modified to accommodate a disabled person contact the Customer Center Phone numbers are provided under If You Need Assistance in Section 9 of this manual N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61 WARNING e Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision The airbags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly In some collisions the airbags won t deploy at all Always wear your seat belts even though you have airbags Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during front airbag deployment could cause serious injury including death Airbags need room to inflate Sit back comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instru ment panel Side airbags also need room to inflate Do not lean against the door Sit upright in the center of the seat Airbag Deployment Sensors and Controls Occupant Restraint Controller ORC The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system required for this vehicle The ORC determines if deployment of the front and or side airbags in a frontal or side collision is required Based on the impact sensors signals a central elec
180. d Deep mud creates a great deal of suction around the tires and is very difficult to get through You should use low L Off Road with the 4WD LOCK engaged and maintain your momentum If you start to slow to a stop try turning your steering wheel no more than a 1 4 turn quickly back and forth for additional traction Mud holes pose an increased threat of vehicle damage and getting stuck They are normally full of debris from previous vehicles getting stuck As a good practice before entering any mud hole get out and determine how deep it is if there are any hidden obstacles and if the vehicle can be safely recovered if stuck Sand Soft sand is very difficult to travel through with full tire pressure When crossing soft sandy spots in a trail maintain your vehicle s momentum and do not stop The key to driving in soft sand is using the appropriate tire pressure accelerating slowly avoiding abrupt maneu vers and maintaining the vehicle s momentum If you are going to be driving on large soft sandy areas or dunes reduce your tire pressure to a minimum of 15 psi 103 kPa to allow for a greater tire surface area You should use low L Off Road with the 4WD LOCK engaged and ESC turned off Reduced tire pressure will drastically improve your traction and handling while driving on the soft sand but you must return the tires to normal air pressure before driving on pavement or other hard surfaces Be sure you have a way to reinflate the
181. d Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on locations other than those indicated in Step 3 3 There are two front jacking locations and two rear jacking locations on each side of the body The front locations are outlined by two triangular cutouts the rear ones by two rectangular cutouts For vehicles equipped with plastic trim the plastic has been cut away to expose the jacking locations in the body Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is securely engaged 81961547 4 Turn the jack screw to the left until the jack can be Jacking Locations placed under the jacking location Once the jack is positioned turn the jack screw to the right until the jack head is properly engaged with the lift area closest to the wheel to be changed Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is securely engaged 372 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES NN Id WARNING Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the vehicle less stable It could slip off the jack and hurt someone near it Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire 5 Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the right using the swivel wrench Raise the vehicle only until the tire just clears the surface and enough clearance is obtained to install the spare tire Minimum tire lift provides maximum stability 6 Remove the wheel nuts and pull the wheel and bolt on center cap if equipped off the hub Install the spare wheel and
182. d cylinder inward and rotate the key to the LOCK position Ignition Switch Positions 1 LOCK 3 ON 2 ACC ACCESSORY 4 START THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13 NOTE If you try to remove the key before you place the shift lever in PARK the key may become trapped tem porarily in the ignition switch cylinder If this occurs rotate the key to the right slightly then remove the key as described If a malfunction occurs the system will trap the key in the ignition cylinder to warn you that this safety feature is inoperable The engine can be started and stopped but the key cannot be removed until you obtain service WARNINCG Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seri ously or fatally injured Do not leave the keys in the ignition A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle 14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves Always remove the key from the ignition and lock all the doors when leaving the vehicle unattended Manual Transmission If Equipped 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ACC Accessory position 2 Push the key and cylinder inward and rotate the key to the LOCK position 020205845 Ignition Switch Positions i lt TOCK 3 ON 2 ACC ACCESSORY 4
183. d d een 188 Bulb Replacement a i443 mee iter s ne RE Rc 416 3 o rm 169 Center Mounted SOP xa cm E 464 eur ees 420 Daytime RUNNING cswc debheTRRRETPRERSA Y 141 Dimmer Switch Headlight Electronic Stability Program ESP Indicator 314 Engine Temperature Warning 187 lur A PC 82 FOO 445 D ET ET 140 196 418 Headlight Switch sie 465 4 ord qeu e X siis 139 ini tel DIS AE NE Roe RR EE OE B 139 Migh Pean lndieator sea saco STERR SES DI 186 Instrument Cluster sse es umso SERE RR EE 139 Es MOE ES ened eee ETE 419 I3ehis On Reminder i33 acier d 9e Sor HAAS 140 Focal CP rm 186 Malfunction Indicator Check Engine 195 Map Redding sicadaeac UR GR RA R oe eo ae Pi 143 i ties Hie RE got eases ae oe 186 Deal Belt Reminder si sister DRR HAD iseni 187 Security Alarm Theft Alarm 18 190 Theft Alarm Security Alarm a eu dicere 446 190 Tire Pressure Monitoring IPMS 192 Traction Control ss aon BEE HA REDE ees d d 314 N INDEX 465 Tun Signal a re ae ee ee 82 139 141 419 ij ts ie tag one ees REID Bae RED HOE 185 Warning Instrument Cluster Description 185 Loading Vehicle vs ke eure ot Re Eos ee BR RES N 350 352 CAPI rrene N eee SA eee ages 352 iii A rv 322 Locks Child TroOteCHON i seat reeta Bode ee DES e WOOP EE EE EO EO EE EDE 24 Power DOOL 444554566 e 59 9E RR AR HER EES 4 28 Luprication DOO ass eris sop DERE SEP EG 393 Luggage Rack Roof Rack
184. d then press the 4 button and say Send The system will prompt you to enter the name or number and say the name of the phonebook entry you wish to send The uconnect phone will then send the corresponding phone number associated with the phonebook entry as tones over the phone NOTE e You may not hear all of the tones due to cellular phone network configurations This is normal e Some paging and voice mail systems have system time out settings that are too short and may not allow the use of this feature Barge In Overriding Prompts The Voice Recognition button can be used when you wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice recognition command immediately For example if a prompt is asking Would you like to pair a phone clear a you could press the 4 button and say Pair a Phone to select that option without having to listen to the rest of the voice prompt Turning Confirmation Prompts ON OFF Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system from confirming your choices e g the uconnect phone will not repeat a phone number before you dial it e Press the amp button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Confirmations The uconnect phone will play the current confirmation prompt status and you will be given the choice to change it N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109 Phone and Network Status Indicators If available on the
185. dio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of folder levels 8 234 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders The radio display of file names and folder names is limited For large numbers of files and or folders the radio may be unable to display the file name and folder name and will assign a number instead With a maximum number of files exceeding 20 folders will result in this display With 200 files exceeding 50 folders will result in this display e Maximum number of characters in file folder names e Level 1 12 including a separator and a three character extension e Level 2 31 including a separator and a three character extension Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times Supported MP3 File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 exten sion as MP3 files Non MP3 files named with the MP3 extension may cause playback problems The radio is
186. ditioning filter Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 442 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES NN Id 138 000 Miles 230 000 km or 144 000 Miles 240 000 km or 144 Months Maintenance Service 138 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter E 11 Change the engine oil and engine oil I Rotate tires filter L1 If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the J Rotate tires engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Change the manual transaxle fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following trailer towing snow plowing heavy loading taxi police delivery service commercial service off road desert operation or more than 50 of your driving is at sustained speeds during hot weather above 90 F 32 C M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L
187. dow and open the door with the outside door handle POWER WINDOWS IF EQUIPPED Power Window Switches Ve 021906196 Power Window Switch Location N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33 The window controls on the driver s door trim panel control all the door windows There are single window Settings Customer Programmable Features in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in controls on each passenger door trim panel which oper ate the passenger door windows The window controls will operate when the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position NOTE For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC the power window switches will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Open ing either front door will cancel this feature For vehicles equipped with the EVIC the power window switches will remain active for up to 10 min utes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front door will cancel this feature The time for this feature is programmable Refer to Key Off Power Delay under Personal Section 4 of this manual WARNING Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in the ignition switch Occupants particularly unattended children can become entrapped by the windows while operating the power window switches Such entrapment may result in serious injury or de
188. dy m O REEDE IEE INTRODUCTION 44399388 9 959 80 n ER WK RE eae ea EN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL STARTING AND OPERATING sesse ss see sesse TABLE OF CONTENTS CONTENTS B Introduction INTRODUCTION B Rollover Warning leere Mi How To Use This Manual 4 W Warnings And Cautions 4 Vehicle Identification Number 5 Wi Vehicle Modifications Alterations 4 INTRODUCTION NEE Id INTRODUCTION Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group LLC vehicle Be assured that it represents precision workmanship distinctive styling and high guality all essentials that are traditional to our vehicles This Owner s Manual has been prepared with the assis tance of service and engineering specialists to acguaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle It is supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet located on the DVD and various customer oriented documents Please take the time to read these publica tions carefully Following the instructions and recom mendations in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle NOTE After you read the manual it should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referencing and remain with the vehicle when sold so that the new owner will
189. e PARK This range supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission The engine can be started in this range Never use PARK while the vehicle is in motion Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range Always apply the parking brake first and then place the shift lever in the PARK position WARNING Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in and near the vehicle As with all vehicles you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running Before exiting a vehicle you should always shift the vehicle into PARK remove the key from the ignition and apply the parking brake Once the key is removed from the ignition the shift lever is locked in the PARK position securing the vehicle against unwanted movement Furthermore you should never leave unattended children inside a vehicle The following indicators should be used to ensure that you have engaged the shift lever into the PARK position e When shifting into PARK firmly move the shift lever all the way forward until it stops 286 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id e Look at the shift indicator window on the shift lever bezel to ensure it is in the PARK position e You must press the brake pedal to move the shift lever out of the PARK position CAUTION Before moving the shift lever out of PARK you must turn the ignition from LOCK to ON so the steering Wheel and shift lever are released Otherwise dam age to the steering
190. e failure and loss of vehicle control e Do not use a tire wheel size or rating other than that specified for your vehicle Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus pension dimensions and performance characteris tics resulting in changes to steering handling and braking of your vehicle This can cause unpredict able handling and stress to steering and suspen CAUTION Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may result in false speedometer and odometer read sion components You could lose control and have ings an accident resulting in serious injury or death Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle TIRE CHAINS Never use a tire with a smaller load index or Due to limited clearance tire chains are not recom capacity other than what was originally equipped mended on your vehicle Using a tire with a smaller load index could result in tire overloading and failure You could lose control and have an accident Continued 334 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id CAUTION Damage to the vehicle may result if tire chains are used SNOW TIRES Some areas of the country reguire the use of snow tires during Winter Standard tires are of the all season type and satisfy this requirement as indicated by the M S designation on the tire sidewall If you need snow tires select tires equivalent in size and type to the original equipment tires U
191. e for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the J Rotate tires engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Change the manual transaxle fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following trailer towing snow plowing heavy loading taxi police delivery service commercial service off road desert operation or more than 50 of your driving is at sustained speeds during hot weather above 90 F 32 C M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 433 54 000 Miles 90 000 km or 54 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate tires M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 434 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M 60 000 Miles 100 000 km or 60 Month
192. e ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio LOAD Button Loading Compact Disc s Press the LOAD button and the pushbutton with the corresponding number 1 6 where the CD is being loaded The radio will display PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to INSERT DISC After the radio displays INSERT DISC insert the CD into the player Radio display will show LOADING DISC when the disc is loading and READING DISC when the radio is reading the disc CAUTION This CD player will accept 4 3 4 in 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism Eject Button Ejecting Compact Disc s Press the EJECT button and the pushbutton A withthe corresponding number 1 6 where the A CD was loaded and the disc will unload and move to the entrance for easy removal Radio display will show EJECTING DISC when the disc is being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc Press and hold the EJECT button for five seconds and all CDs will be ejected from the radio The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF 218 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN SEEK Button CD MODE Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection Pressing and holding
193. e perfor mance and damage the emission control system tions of Methanol Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer An out of tune engine or certain fuel or ignition 5 malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control overheat If you notice a pungent burning odor or systems can result in civil penalties being assessed some light smoke your engine may be out of tune against you or malfunctioning and may require immediate service Contact your authorized dealer for service assistance Continued 348 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id Carbon Monoxide Warnings WARNING Continued e Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance Have the exhaust system inspected every time the vehicle is raised Have any abnor WARNING Carbon monoxide CO in exhaust gases is deadly Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning e Do not inhale exhaust gases They contain carbon monoxide a colorless and odorless gas which can mal conditions repaired promptly Until repaired drive with all side windows fully open Keep the liftgate closed when driving your vehicle to prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous exhaust gases from entering the vehicle kill Never run the engine in a closed area such as a garage and never sit in a parked vehi
194. e required in some areas of the country during the winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in your vehicle CAUTION DO NOT use gasolines containing Methanol or E85 Ethanol Use of these blends may result in starting and drivability problems and may damage critical fuel system components Problems that result from using methanol gasoline blends are not the responsibility of the manufacturer While MTBE is an oxygenate made from Methanol it does not have the negative effects of Methanol E 85 Usage In Non Flex Fuel Vehicles Non FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline contain ing 10 ethanol E10 Gasoline with higher ethanol content may void the vehicle s warranty If a Non FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E 85 fuel the engine will have some or all of these symptoms e operate in a lean mode e OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on e poor engine performance e poor cold start and cold drivability e increased risk for fuel system component corrosion 346 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id To fix a Non FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with E 85 perform the following e drain the fuel tank see your authorized dealer e change the engine oil and oil filter e disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the engine controller memory More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged exposure to E 85 fuel MMT In Gasoline MMT is a man
195. e second call is in progress To go back to the first call refer to Toggling Between Calls in this section To combine two calls refer to Conference Call in this section Place Retrieve a Call From Hold To put a call on hold press the button until you hear a single beep This indicates that the call is on hold To bring the call back from hold press and hold the button until you hear a single beep Toggling Between Calls If two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press the button until you hear a single beep indicat ing that the active and hold status of the two calls have switched Only one call can be placed on hold at a time Conference Call When two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press and hold the button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call 104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN ed Three Way Calling To initiate three way calling press the u button while a call is in progress and make a second phone call as described under Making a Second Call While Current Call is in Progress After the second call has established press and hold the amp button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call Call Termination To end a call in progress momentarily press the amp button Only the active call s will be terminated and if
196. e shifting from PARK 21 Odometer Trip Odometer Reset Button Press this button to change the display from odometer to either of the two trip odometer settings Trip A or Trip B will appear when in the trip odometer mode Push in and hold the button for two seconds to reset the trip odometer to 0 miles 0 km The odometer must be in Trip mode to reset 192 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id 22 Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Each tire including the spare if provided i should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated Accordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illumi nates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handli
197. e to the negative post of the discharged battery The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode and could result in personal injury 5 Connect the other cable first to the negative terminal of the booster battery and then to the engine of the vehicle with the discharged battery Make sure you have a good contact 6 If the vehicle is equipped with a Sentry Key Immo bilizer turn the ignition switch to the ON position for three seconds before moving the ignition switch to the START position 7 Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster battery let the engine idle a few minutes then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery 8 When removing the jumper cables reverse the se quence exactly Be careful of the moving belts and fan WARNING Any procedure other than above could result in e Personal injury caused by electrolyte squirting out the battery vent e Personal injury due to battery explosion CAUTION Any procedure other than above could result in damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle or of the immobilized vehicle 376 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES NN Id FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE CAUTION Continued If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud sand or snow it can often be moved by a rocking motion Turn your Revving the engine ido spinning the wheels too fast steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the may lead to transmission ove
198. ealer The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON position NOTE This light shows only that the parking brake is applied It does not show the degree of brake application 15 Transmission Temperature Warning Light During sustained high speed driving on hot days the automatic transaxle oil may become too hot If this happens the Transmission Tem perature Warning Light will come on and the vehicle will slow slightly until the automatic transaxle 190 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL cools down enough to allow a return to the reguested speed If the high speed is maintained the overheating will reoccur as before in a cyclic fashion CAUTION Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera ture Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause severe transmission damage or transmission failure WARNING In some circumstances a Transmission Temperature Warning Light under continued operation could cause the fluid to boil over come in contact with hot engine or exhaust components and cause a fire 16 Vehicle Security Light If Equipped This light will flash at a fast rate for approxi e mately 16 seconds when the vehicle security alarm is arming and then will flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed 17 Temperature Gauge The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera ture Any reading within the normal range indicates that the engine cooling
199. ear 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hybrid Organic Additive Technology or equivalent in water should be used Use higher concentrations not to exceed 70 if temperatures below 34 F 37 C are antici pated Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized water when mixing the water engine coolant antifreeze solution The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system Please note that it is the owner s responsibility to main tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated NOTE Mixing engine coolant antifreeze types will decrease the life of the engine coolant antifreeze and will require more frequent coolant changes Cooling System Pressure Cap The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine coolant antifreeze and to ensure that engine coolant antifreeze will return to the radiator from the coolant recovery bottle The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces 400 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id WARNING e The warning words DO NOT OPEN HOT on the cooling system pressure cap are a safety pre caution Never add engine coolant antifreeze when the engine is overheated Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated engine Heat causes pressure to build up in the cool
200. ease cycle your handheld transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink has 156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M successfully accepted the freguency signal The indica tor light will flash slowly and then rapidly when fully trained If you unplugged the device for training plug it back in at this time Then proceed with Step 4 under Programming HomeLink earlier in this section Using HomeLink To operate press and release the programmed HomeLink button Activation will now occur for the trained device i e garage door opener gate operator Security system entry door lock home office lighting etc The handheld transmitter of the device may also be used at any time Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained follow these steps 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 2 Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds Do not release the button 3 Without releasing the button proceed with Program ming HomeLink Step 2 and follow all remaining steps Security It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in your vehicle To do this press and hold the two outside buttons for 20 seconds until the red indicator flashes Note that all channels will be erased Individual channels cannot be erased The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled
201. ecognize only files with the MP3 exten sion as MP3 files Non MP3 files named with the MP3 extension may cause playback problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 files use a 44 1 kHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rates 246 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id MPEG Sampling Feet as Pit Rate pe 320 256 224 192 160 128 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 160 128 144 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 24 16 8 ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios MPEG 1 Audio Layer 3 48 44 1 32 MPEG 2 Audio Layer 3 24 22 05 16 Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported Playback of MP3 Files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load t
202. ed e If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads consider mud or stone shields behind each wheel e Use MOPAR Touch Up Paint or equivalent on scratches as soon as possible Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle Wheel And Wheel Trim Care All wheels and wheel trim especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion To remove heavy soil use MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or select a nonabrasive non acidic cleaner Do not use scouring pads steel wool a bristle brush or metal polishes Only MOPARS cleaners or equivalent are recommended Do not use oven cleaner Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheels protective finish Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure If Equipped Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man ner e Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting with a clean dry towel e Blot any remaining stain with a clean damp towel e For tough stains apply MOPAR Total Clean or a mild soap solution to a clean damp cloth and remove the stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue e For grease stains apply MOPAR Multi Purpose Cleaner or a equivalent high quality cleaner to a clean damp cloth and remove the stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue e Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of protectants
203. ed on a lift The jack is designed to use as a tool for changing tires only The jack should not be used to lift the Spare Tire and Jack Stowage vehicle for service purposes The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level surface only Avoid ice or slippery areas Spare Tire Stowage The spare tire is stowed under the rear load floor in the cargo area Jack Location Spare Tire Removal The jack and jack handle are stowed under the load floor Lift up the load floor cover and remove the hold down in the cargo area N WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 369 Preparations For Jacking 6 Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally opposite the jacking position For example if changing the right front tire block the left rear wheel 1 Park the vehicle on a firm level surface Avoid ice or slippery areas Serma I TR us inr i th N li i welt if ek a We WARNINCG Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the PH Hi HT ii lt 41 imd la I1 vehicle close to moving traffic Pull far enough off NOTE Passengers should not remain in the vehicle the road to avoid the danger of being hit when while the vehicle is being jacked operating the jack or changing the wheel Jacking Instructions 2 Set the parking brake WARNING 6 3 Place the shift lever into PARK automatic transmis can ope ERE manual fcahistii con Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help prev
204. eee 386 Gloss El DUS D A11 Gross Axle Weight Rating oa ek etek EE YS 353 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating 351 353 Hands Free Phone uconnect 92 Hazard Driving Through Flowing Rising or Shallow Standing Water 290 Hazard Warning Flasher x aa wore d dcm oot hurd 366 Head Restraints lee 132 els el ae entrant ond woes xd TE EE sea ha 416 iS AE Oe os ESE EE SAS EET hae 410 Tio Ded Same ER eee ed per Hye a bees 142 High Beam Low Beam Select Switch 142 ccn Aa AR OE hea ees oa psec none OOK 142 REOISCING 3x5 murs EX EERS ERK E 416 SWIICI se pba AE meom aoe be ae we Bo 139 Heated Mirrors 22 eee ka RIEX 9 Heated Seats lees 130 els RA AA SAO AE EE OE N EE 261 Heater Engine Block 2362454555 t SE s 280 Hill Descent Control less 196 311 Hill Start Assist llle 212 N INDEX 463 Hitches ale TOE wage Gah 308 BAK BEE DE d 355 HomeLink Garage Door Opener Transmitter 151 Hood Release ee 137 ea le EE AAS EE ET N ER ERTS 12 Key weet Gana gan SEE DEL RS ee oe ROER EA 12 Ignition Key Removal 2 32265 mes 12 imobilizer ent v Key soog ys med wes va ers 15 Infant Restraint llle 71 Information Center Vehicle Ln 198 Inside Rearview Mirror leen 87 Instrument Cluster llle 185 Instrument Panel and Controls 183 Instrument Panel Cover 411 I
205. een Shuffle ON and Shuffle OFF modes for the iPod If the RND icon is showing on the radio display then the shuffle mode is ON NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 251 List Or Browse Mode During Play mode pressing any of the buttons described below takes you to List mode List mode enables you to scroll through the list of menus and tracks on the iPod e TUNE control knob The TUNE control knob functions in a similar manner as the scroll wheel on the iPod e Turning it clockwise forward and counterclock wise backward scrolls through the lists displaying the track detail on the radio display Once you have the track to be played highlighted on the radio display press the TUNE control knob to select and start playing the track Turning the TUNE control knob fast will scroll through the list faster During fast scroll you may notice a slight delay in updating the information on the radio display During all List modes the iPod displays all lists in wrap around mode So if the track is at the bottom of the list just turn the wheel backwards counter clockwise to get to the track faster 252 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id e In List mode the radio PRESET Buttons are used as e LIST button The LIST button will display the top shortcuts to the following lists on the iPod level menu of the iPod Turn the TUNE control knob to list the top menu item you wish to select and press the TUNE control k
206. eep say Mute In order to un mute the uconnect phone e Press the we button e Following the beep say Mute off 110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Advanced Phone Connectivity Transfer Call to and from Cellular Phone The uconnect phone allows ongoing calls to be trans ferred from your cellular phone to the uconnect phone without terminating the call To transfer an ongoing call from your uconnect phone paired cellular phone to the uconnect phone or vice versa press the t button and say Transfer Call Connect or Disconnect Link Between the uconnect phone and Cellular Phone Your cellular phone can be paired with many different electronic devices but can only be actively connected with one electronic device at a time If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth connection between a uconnect phone paired cellular phone and the uconnect phone follow the instructions described in your cellular phone User s Manual List Paired Cellular Phone Names e Press the amp button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing e When prompted say List Phones e The uconnect phone will play the phone names of all paired cellular phones in order from the highest to the lowest priority To select or delete a paired phone being announced press the u button and say Se lect or Delete Also see the next two secti
207. egal highway speed for any distance if the manual transaxle is in NEUTRAL and the ignition key is in the ACC position CAUTION e DO NOT flat tow any vehicle equipped with a automatic transaxle Damage to the drivetrain will result If these vehicles require towing make sure all four wheels are off the ground Front or rear wheel lifts should not be used Internal damage to the transaxle will occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when recreational towing WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CONTENTS N Hazard Warning Flasher 366 O Jacking Instructions 369 H If Your Engine Overheats 366 W Jump Starting Procedures 373 W Automatic Transaxle Overheating 367 W Freeing A Stuck Vehicle sis oes od de ede oe N Jacking And Tire Changing 368 W Towing A Disabled Vehicle El ae FLOOR UOTE esce d eR uen e dr ed x e i ds 368 O With onion Key ces eet sheave Elopare DueloWBDE s ou noe 46h s ER ER EE 368 o Without The Ignition Key 378 O Preparations For Jacking 369 366 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES NN Id HAZARD WARNING FLASHER The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the instrument panel below the radio Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning flasher When the switch is activated all directional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emergency Press the switch a seco
208. emains on it means that the vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging system Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY See an autho rized dealer UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 185 If jump starting is required refer to Jump Starting Procedures in section 6 of this manual 3 Electronic Throttle Control ETC Light This light informs you of a problem with the A Electronic Throttle Control ETC system If a problem is detected the light will come on while the engine is running Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is placed in the NEUTRAL position The light should turn off If the light remains lit with the engine running your vehicle will usually be drivable however see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible If the light is flashing when the engine is running imme diate service is required and you may experience reduced performance an elevated rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing The light will come on when the ignition is first turned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light does not come on during starting have the system checked by an autho rized dealer 186 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN ed 4 Oil Pressure Warning Light Q57 This light indicates low engine oil pressure The light should turn on momentarily when the engine is started If the light turns on while driving stop the vehicle and shut off
209. ent personal injury or damage to your 4 Turn OFF the ignition vehicle 5 Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher Continued 370 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES NN Id WARNING Continued Always park on a firm level surface as far from the edge of the roadway as possible before raising the vehicle Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be raised WARNING Continued e If working on or near a roadway be extremely careful of motor traffic e To assure that spare tires flat or inflated are securely stowed spares must be stowed with the valve stem facing the ground e Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic transmission in PARK a manual transmission in REVERSE Qui Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a A 5 es jack Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a LI LP jack NS Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack Jack Warning Label Only use the jack in the positions indicated and 1 Remove the scissors jack and lug wrench from the for lifting this vehicle during a tire change spare wheel as an assembly Turn the jack screw to the left Continued to loosen the lug wrench and remove the wrench from the jack assembly NN WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 371 2 Loosen but do not remove the wheel nuts by turning CAUTIONN Y O CAUTION them to the left one turn while the wheel is still on the groun
210. er 68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M Airbag Warning Light You will want to have the airbags ready to inflate for your protection in a collision While the airbag system is designed to be mainte nance free if any of the following occurs have an authorized dealer service the system immediately e The Airbag Warning Light does not come on during the six to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first turned on e The light remains on after the six to eight second interval e The light comes on and remains on while driving NOTE If the speedometer tachometer or any engine related gauges are not working the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC may also be disabled The airbags may not be ready to inflate for your protection Promptly check the fuse block for blown fuses Refer to the label located on the inside of the fuse block cover for the proper airbag fuses See your authorized dealer if the fuse is good Event Data Recorder EDR In the event of an accident your vehicle is designed to record up to five seconds of specific vehicle data param eters see list below in an event data recorder prior to the moment of airbag deployment or near deployment if applicable and up to a quarter second of either high speed deceleration data or change in velocity during and or after airbag deployment or near deployment EDR data is ONLY recorded if an airbag deploys or nearly deploys and is otherwise un
211. er consider the following Caution and Warning before doing so ee STARTING AND OPERATING 291 CAUTION e Always check the depth of the standing water CAUTION Continued e Driving through standing water may cause dam before driving through it Never drive through standing water that is deeper than the bottom of the tire rims mounted on the vehicle Determine the condition of the road or the path that is under water and if there are any obstacles in the way before driving through the standing wa ter Do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h when driving through standing water This will minimize wave effects Continued age to your vehicle s drivetrain components Al ways inspect your vehicle s fluids i e engine oil transmission transaxle axle etc for signs of con tamination i e fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance after driving through standing water Do not continue to operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated as this may result in further damage Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Getting water inside your vehicle s engine can cause it to lock up and stall out and cause serious internal damage to the engine Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty 292 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id WARNING e Driving through standing water limits your vehi cle s traction capabilities Do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h when driving through st
212. er than 12 Volt system i e do not use a 24 Volt power source During cold weather when temperatures are be low the freezing point electrolyte in a discharged battery may freeze Do not attempt jump starting because the battery could rupture or explode The battery temperature must be brought above the freezing point before attempting jump start NOTE Disconnecting the battery with the ignition in the ON position will cause vehicles with an automatic transaxle CVT2 to go into default mode and turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL See your autho rized dealer to correct this condition 1 When boosting from a battery in another vehicle park that vehicle within booster cable reach but without letting the vehicles touch Set the parking brake place the automatic transmission in PARK the manual transmis sion in NEUTRAL and turn the ignition to OFF for both vehicles WARNING Do not permit vehicles to touch each other as this could establish a ground connection and personal injury could result 2 Turn off the heater radio and all unnecessary electrical loads 3 Using the two finger screws on the cover remove the air intake duct covering the battery N WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 375 4 Connect one end of a jumper cable to the positive terminal of the booster battery Connect the other end of the jumper cable to the positive terminal of the dis charged battery WARNING Do not connect the cabl
213. ering column while driving Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv ing with the steering column unlocked could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle Be sure the steering column is locked before driving your ve hicle Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL IF EQUIPPED When engaged Electronic Speed Control takes over accelerator operation at speeds greater than 25 mph 40 km h The Electronic Speed Control lever is located on the right side of the steering wheel 81bc4c2c Electronic Speed Control Lever NOTE In order to ensure proper operation the Elec tronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated simultaneously If this occurs the Electronic Speed Con trol System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic Speed Control ON OFF button and resetting the desired vehicle set speed N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149 To Activate Push the ON OFF button The CRUISE indicator in the instrument cluster will illuminate To turn the system off push the ON OFF button a second time The CRUISE indicator will turn off The system should be turned off when not in use WARNING Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on when not in use is dangerous You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want You could lose control and have an accident
214. erior can occur if you drive too fast or through too deep of water Water can cause permanent damage to engine driveline or other vehicle components and your brakes will be less effective once wet and or muddy Before You Cross Any Type Of Water As you approach any type of water you need to deter mine if you can cross it safely and responsibly If neces sary get out and walk through the water or probe it with a stick You need to be sure of its depth approach angle current and bottom condition Be careful of murky or muddy waters check for hidden obstacles Make sure you will not be intruding on any wildlife and you can recover the vehicle if necessary The key to a safe crossing is the water depth current and bottom conditions On soft bottoms the vehicle will sink in effectively increas ing the water level on the vehicle Be sure to consider this when determining the depth and the ability to safely cross Crossing Puddles Pools Flooded Areas Or Other Standing Water Puddles pools flooded or other standing water areas normally contain murky or muddy waters These water types normally contain hidden obstacles and make it difficult to determine an accurate water depth approach angle and bottom condition Murky or muddy water holes are where you want to hook up tow straps prior to entering This makes for a faster cleaner and easier vehicle recovery If you are able to determine you can safely cross than proceed using t
215. es ea 0 4 Emission Control System Maintenance 384 426 Eie 46446550545 OES tare ER HER HERO 382 PORT E serte rera SE ET 280 Break In Recommendations 79 Checking OIl LEVEL 2225399923309 RS ER 387 COOUNG EERS RED cae E E EERS Genser es 397 Exhaust Gas Caution 00 80 348 Fuel Requirements 2 22 RR RR 344 Jump SIGTE voe ske 32 3 bes 2 Ss Sa EE a 373 Oi OR ARE HER aes 387 421 422 Jil hance lei dl 2295 24 05 beeeeg DEL ai 388 Oil Killer Cap is deos ei rU E ACRES bees 382 389 alls woe ese pee ER suo T 422 Bu Dm 388 Oid cd PCT ER Oe DEE 389 verlies ea ERA SR EERS EE 1063 E ERA 366 Temperature Gauge oos siena da RE EA on 190 Enhanced Accident Response Feature 65 Exhaust Gas Caution 35 80 348 394 395 ExXiaUstovstem st gk doe 2028 beng RR HY 80 394 l USE ie 44244536555 Gyn ceee ee eee 82 N INDEX 461 Filters Air Cleaner 22 5 43 be 4 ae eh RSS RE SoR 3 390 PIC COUGUIONING 5 4 40s 494 ura I Rum Hs 2 DOE Ci us seen ReUPA TRI CENE ER EY 390 422 dcc AAT en 248 acids awe obese bo ees 366 Hazard WANNE sreg os 044 86 be EER ae ans 366 Ti Sal ee dk Se REESE SPP ES 82 186 419 Plat Tite GOWA E 5444 24 eee4 ieee dee cases DD Hooded Engine Starine desuewrags 9292929 280 Pluid Brak 24 2229 orm hdd node ovr 423 EG CUPIS a sagr ereraa DR ee ees d DE MO 421 Pitid Leaks cus oe xA GREG ERROR DERE 82 Fluid Level Checks Automatic Transaxle less 405 Power IEE
216. es ss 278 o Manual Transaxle If Equipped 278 H Automatic Transaxle If Equipped 278 O Normal SIE soe RD HARE eee ee ERES 279 O Extreme Cold Weather Below 20 TE 20A oteeaves eu yee ac 279 oO If Engine Fails To Start ise sem 280 BAT Slate eaire ox HER eee PRE EE 280 N Engine Block Heater If Equipped 280 Bl Manual Transaxle If Equipped O Five Speed Manual Transaxle B Recommended Shift Speeds El DOWNSMLUNS sies se VR RE He eee Reed Bl Automatic Transaxle If Equipped D Brake Transmission Interlock System H Automatic Transaxle Ignition Interlock M P sies IEEE eee cR TURPE EUR dE Ha de RUE 274 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id N AutoStick If Equipped 286 HOPE od Misa was Gee Ee RE HE UR py a os 287 O General Information 2a du dr RE mx 287 ll Four Wheel Drive Operation I Eguipped pate da du Seded RE HERE be d 288 Bl Driving On Slippery Surfaces 289 ELA GCSIBIG ON 9s oon 13 0 933209 28 ED EIS oe 289 Mi ede EER EE oo as one Oh ee ees oe Pd 289 N Driving Through Water 290 oO Flowing Rising Water 290 O Shallow Standing Water 2 0 5 290 M On Road Driving Tips 292 E Off Road Driving Tips 293 3 When To Use Low L Off Road With The 4WD Lock Lever Engaged s cnt n 293 3 Driving In Snow Mud And Sand 294
217. essage temporarily press and release the Trip Odometer button on the instrument cluster To reset the oil change indicator system after performing the sched uled maintenance refer to the following procedure 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position Do not start the engine 2 Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds 3 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF LOCK position NOTE If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle the oil change indicator system did not reset If necessary repeat this procedure 24 OFF ROAD Indicator If Equipped The symbol illuminates is armed when the 4WD lock switch is activated and the shift lever is in LOW or REVERSE position UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 195 25 Malfunction Indicator Light MIL The Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is part of C5 an Onboard Diagnostic system called OBD II that monitors emissions engine and automatic trans mission control systems The light will illuminate when the key is in the ON RUN position before engine start If the light does not come on when turning the key from OFF to ON RUN have the condition checked promptly Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap poor fuel quality etc may illuminate the light after engine start The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several of your typical driving cycles In most situations the vehicle will drive nor
218. ever is placed into the PARK position from any other position and then moved out of the PARK position This will occur even if the message was previously cleared WARNING With the ESC switched off the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESC is unavailable In an emer gency evasive maneuver the ESC system will not engage to assist in maintaining stability ESC Off mode is intended for off highway or off road use only 318 STARTING AND OPERATING TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION Tire Markings 1 U S DOT Safety Standards Code TIN 2 Size Designation 3 Service Description 054903773 4 Maximum Load 5 Maximum Pressure 6 Treadwear Traction and Temperature Grades NOTE e P Passenger Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards P Metric tires have the letter P molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa tion Example P215 65R15 95H European Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width The letter P is absent from this tire size designation Example 215 65R15 96H LT Light Truck Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards The size designation for LI Metric tires is the same as for P Metric tires except for the letters LT that are molded into the sidewall preced ing the size designation Example LT235 85R16 Tempor
219. eviously mentioned Based on the severity and type of collision the side airbag inflator on the crash side of the vehicle may be triggered releasing a quantity of non toxic gas The inflating side airbag exits through the seat seam into the space between the occupant and the door The side airbags fully inflate in about 10 milliseconds The side airbag moves at a very high speed and with such a high force that it could injure you if you are not seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the side airbag inflates This especially applies to children Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain SABIC Inflator Units If Equipped During collisions where the impact is confined to a particular area of the side of the vehicle the ORC may deploy the SABIC Airbags depending on severity and type of collision In these events the ORC will deploy the SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle A quantity of non toxic gas is generated to inflate the side curtain airbag The inflating side curtain airbag pushes the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the window The airbag inflates in about 30 ms about one quarter of the time that it takes to blink your eyes with enough force to injure you if you are not belted and seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the side curtain airbag inflates This especially applies to children The side curtain airbag is only about 3 1 2 in 9 cm thic
220. eys 2 2 2644 RS RTT ES 16 O Customer Key Programming 17 O General Information ss ss core ma 18 ll Vehicle Security Alarm If Equipped H To Set The Security Alarm o To Disarm The System D Vehicle Security Alarm Manual Override ll Remote Keyless Entry RKE If Equipped o To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate D Remote Key Unlock Driver Door All First Press oO Illuminated Approach If Equipped 10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id o To Lock The Doors And Liftgate 21 O Sound Horn With Remote Key Lock 3 Flash Lights With Remote Key Lock Unlock 22 Hr Using The Panic Alarm 557 4 9 2 Y vx 29 O Programming Additional Transmitters 23 O General Information 2936 eae cia RS Es 25 O Transmitter Battery Replacement 29 ll Remote Starting System If Equipped 24 B How Io Use Remote Start s ue res 25 aM Door Locks ss sere OE meson eR dns 27 br Manual Door Locks 2222 dE 46045 27 b Power Door Vee ARE EE EE 28 o Child Protection Door Lock System Rear Doors ai ew 64 4 EE Ee OER HS RE ORG 31 N Power Windows If Equipped 32 O Power Window Switches 32 BE ALG DOU sogea aaae 4 oes 6 acon EE 33 O Window Lockout Switch 34 Re ee ee eee er 34 W Occupant Restraints 000 36 tap Shoulder Belts 2 44 42 tod 6m awe ohn sare 37 o Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage 42 O Seco
221. eze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hybrid Organic Additive Technology or equivalent Engine Oil Use API Certified SAE 5W 20 Engine Oil meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade Engine Oil Filter MOPAR Engine Oil Filter or equivalent Spark Plugs ZFR5F 11 Gap 0 043 in 1 1 mm Fuel Selection N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 423 Chassis Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Automatic Transaxle CVT If MOPAR CVTF 4 Equipped Manual Transaxle If Equipped MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed ATF 4 product Rear Drive Assembly RDA MOPAR Gear amp Axle Lubricant SAE 80W 90 API GL 5 or equivalent non synthetic product Power Transfer Unit PTU MOPAR Gear amp Axle Lubricant SAE 80W 90 API GL 5 or equivalent non synthetic product fluid is not available then DOT 4 is acceptable Use only recommended brake fluids or equivalent Power a Reservoir MOPAR Power Steering Fluid 4 MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Trans ee Fluid or equivalent licensed ATF 4 product Brake Master Cylinder MOPAR DOT 3 SAE J1703 should be used If DOT 3 SAE J1703 brake MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES CONTENTS N Emissions Control System Maintenance 426 Bl Maintenance Schedule 426 H Required Maintenance Intervals 428 M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8
222. f the electronic parts of the system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON position If the key is in the OFF position in the ACC position or not in the ignition the airbags are not on and will not inflate The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may deploy the airbags even if the battery loses power or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment Also the ORC turns on the Airbag Warning Light in the instrument panel for approxi mately six to eight seconds for a self check when the ignition is first turned on After the self check the Airbag Warning Light will turn off If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system it turns on the Airbag Warning Light either momentarily or continuously A single chime will sound if the light comes on again after initial startup o Y N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63 It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instru ment cluster Airbag Warning Light if a malfunction is noted The diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction WARNING Ignoring the Airbag Warning Light in your instru ment panel could mean you won t have the airbags to protect you in a collision If the light does not come on stays on after you start the vehicle or if it comes on as you drive have the airbag system checked right away Driver and Passenger Airbag Inflator Units The Driver and Passenger Airbag Inflator Units are located in the ce
223. fficient heating If side win dow fogging becomes a problem increase blower speed Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild but rainy or humid weather NOTE Recirculate without A C should not be used for long periods as fogging may occur Side Window Demisters A side window demister outlet is located at each end of the instrument panel These non adjustable outlets direct air toward the side windows when the system is in the FLOOR MIX or DEFROST mode The air is directed at the area of the windows through which you view the outside mirrors Outside Air Intake Make sure the air intake located directly in front of the windshield is free of obstructions such as leaves Leaves collected in the air intake may reduce airflow and if they enter the plenum they could plug the water drains In winter months make sure the air intake is clear of ice slush and snow A C Air Filter If Equipped The A C Filter prevents most dust and pollen from entering the cabin The filter acts on air coming from outside the vehicle and recirculated air within the pas senger compartment Refer to Maintenance Procedures in Section 7 of this manual for A C Air Filter service information or see your authorized dealer for service Refer to the Maintenance Schedules in Section 8 of this manual for filter service intervals 272 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id Control Setting Suggestions for Various Weather Conditions
224. fire Do not remove the air cleaner unless such removal is necessary for repair or Engine Oil Filter The engine oil filter should be replaced at every engine oil change Engine Oil Filter Selection All of this manufacturer s engines have a full flow type disposable oil filter Use a filter of this type for replace ment The quality of replacement filters varies consider ably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine oil filters are high quality oil filters and are recommended Engine Air Cleaner Filter Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for the proper maintenance intervals maintenance Make sure that no one is near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air cleaner removed Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies considerably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine air cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recommended Maintenance Free Battery The top of the maintenance free battery is permanently sealed You will never have to add water nor is periodic maintenance required N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 391 WARNING WARNING Continued e Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that burn or even b
225. front passenger and position everyone for the best interaction with the Advanced Front airbag Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying airbag 1 Children 12 years old and younger should always ride buckled up in a rear seat WARNING Infants in rear facing child restraints should NEVER ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger front airbag An airbag deployment can cause severe injury or death to infants in that position 60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat belt properly see section on Child Restraints should be secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt positioning booster seats Older children who do not use child restraints or belt positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled up in the rear seat Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm If a child from 1 to 12 years old not in a rear facing child seat must ride in the front passenger seat move the seat as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint Refer to information on Child Restraints in this section You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly 2 All occupants should ALWAYS wear their lap and shoulder belts properly 3 The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as pra
226. front seat the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to position the belt away from your neck Push the anchorage button to release the anchorage and move it up or down to the position that fits you best NOTE The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is equipped with an Easy Up feature This feature allows the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward position without pressing the release button To verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched pull downward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked into position 022607727 Adjustable Anchorage As a guide if you are shorter than average you will prefer a lower position and if you are taller than average you will prefer a higher position When you release the anchorage try to move it down to make sure that it is locked in position THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43 In the rear seat move toward the center of the seat to position the belt away from your neck Second Row Center Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions The second row center lap shoulder belt features a three point seat belt with a mini latch and buckle which allows the shoulder belt to detach from the lower anchor when the seat is folded The mini buckle and shoulder belt can then be stored out of the way in the right side trim panel for added convenience 44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME 1 Remove the mini latch and regular latch from
227. g conditions the fluid installed at the factory will give satisfactory lubrication for the life of the vehicle Fluid changes are not necessary unless lubri cant has become contaminated with water 406 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ME NOTE If contaminated with water the fluid should be changed immediately Rear Drive Assembly RDA AWD 4WD Models Only Lubricant Selection Use only the manufacturer s recommended fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section for the correct fluid type Fluid Level Check Visually inspect the unit at each oil change for leakage If leakage is detected check the fluid level by removing the fill plug The fluid level should be maintained between the bottom of the fill hole to 1 8 in 4 mm below the fill hole Add fluid if necessary to maintain the proper level Frequency Of Fluid Change Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for the proper maintenance intervals Power Transfer Unit PTU AWD 4WD Models Only Lubricant Selection Use only the manufacturer s recommended fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section for the correct fluid type Fluid Level Check Visually inspected the unit at each oil change for leakage If leakage is detected Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug The fluid level should be maintained be tween the bottom of the fill hole to 1 8 in 4 mm below the fill hole Add flu
228. g on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions ESC cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous mannet which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others STARTING AND OPERATING 315 ESC Malfunction Indicator Light The ESC Malfunction Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position It should go out with the engine running If the ESC Malfunction Indicator Light comes on continu ously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system If this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles kilometers at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected NOTE e The ESC Off Indicator Light and the ESC Malfunc tion Indicator Light come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON e Each time the ignition is turned ON the ESC system will be ON even if it was turned off previously 316 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id e The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds whe
229. ganese containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase the octane num ber Gasolines blended with MMT offer no performance advantage beyond gasolines of the same octane number without MMT Gasolines blended with MMT have been shown to reduce spark plug life and reduce emission system performance in some vehicles The manufacturer recommends using gasolines without MMT Since the MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the pump you should ask your gasoline retailer whether or not their gasoline contains MMT It is even more important to look for gasolines without MMT in Canada because MMT can be used at levels higher than those allowed in the United States MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformu lated gasolines Materials Added To Fuel All gasoline sold in the United States is required to contain effective detergent additives Use of additional detergents or other additives is not needed under normal conditions and would result in additional cost Therefore you should not have to add anything to the fuel ee STARTING AND OPERATING 347 Fuel System Cautions CAUTION Continued CAUTION e The use of fuel additives which are now being sold as octane enhancers is not recommended Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle s Most of these products contain high concentra performance e The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law Using leaded gasoline can impair engin
230. gasoline is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle You could be burned Always place gas containers on the ground while filling NOTE e When the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the fuel tank is full e Tighten the gas cap about 1 4 turn until you hear one click This is an indication that cap is properly tight ened e f the gas cap is not tighten properly the MIL will come on Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time the vehicle is refueled Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose or improperly installed a gASCAP message will be displayed in the Odometer Trip Odom eter in the instrument cluster Refer to Instrument Cluster Description in Section 4 of this manual Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the odometer trip odometer RESET button to turn the message off If the problem continues the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started Refer to Onboard Diagnostic System OBD II in Section 7 of this manual for more information VEHICLE LOADING As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Admin istration regulations your vehicle has a certification label affixed to the driver s side door or B Pillar ee STARTING AND OPERATING 351 Vehicle Certification Label Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label attached to The GVWR is the total allowable weight of
231. ging the Time Zone 1 Turn on the radio 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 Touch the screen where the words Set Time Zone are displayed The time zone selection menu will appear on the screen 4 Select a time zone by touching the screen where your selection appears If you do not see a time zone that you want to select touch the screen where the word Page is displayed to view additional time zones in the menu 5 Touch the screen where the word Save is displayed Clock Setting Procedure RER REN Radio uconnect gps RER Only The GPS receiver used in this system is synchronized to the time data being transmitted by the GPS satellite The satellite clock is Greenwich Mean Time GMT This is the worldwide standard for time This makes the system s clock very accurate once the appropriate time zone and daylight savings information is set 226 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id To Manually Set the Clock RER REN 1 Turn on the radio 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed 3 Touch the screen where User Clock is displayed the clock setting menu will appear on the screen 4 To move the hour forward touch the screen where the word Hour with the arrow pointing upward is dis played To move the hour backward touch the screen where the word Hour with the arrow pointing down ward is displayed
232. h Press and hold the EVIC button when in this display until ON or OFF appears to make your selection Auto Unlock On Exit When ON is selected all the vehicle s doors will unlock when the driver s door is opened if the vehicle is stopped manual transmission or the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL 204 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN position automatic transmission Press and hold the EVIC button when in this display until ON or OFF appears to make your selection RKE Unlock Driver s Door 1st When Driver s Door 1st is selected only the driver s door will unlock on the first press of the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter UNLOCK button and require a second press to unlock the remaining locked doors When Re mote Unlock All Doors is selected all of the doors will unlock at the first press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button Press and hold the EVIC button when in this display until Driver s Door 1st or All Doors appears to make your selection Flash Lamps with Lock When ON is selected the front and rear turn signals will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked using the RKE transmitter This feature may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected Press and hold the EVIC button when in this display until ON or OFF appears to make your selection Sound Horn with Lock When ON is selected a short horn sound will occur when
233. han non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 247 LIST Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders on the disc Scrolling up or down the list is done by turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob Selecting a folder by pressing the TUNE SCROLL control knob will begin playing the files contained in that folder or the next folder in seguence if the selection does not contain playable files The folder list will time out after five seconds INFO Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through the following TAG information Song Title Artist File Name and Folder Name if available Press the INFO button once more to return to elapsed time priority mode Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or more and the radio will display song titles for each file Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds to return to elapsed time display Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 player or cassette player and utilize
234. hased 911 for the U S and Canada and 060 for Mexico The number dialed may not be applicable with the available cellular service and area in emergency situations when the cellular phone has network coverage and stays paired to the uconnect phone Towing Assistance If you need towing assistance e Press the amp button to begin e If supported this number may be programmable on some systems To do this press the amp button and say Setup followed by Emergency e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Towing Assistance NOTE e The uconnect phone does slightly lower your e The towing assistance number dialed is based on the chances of successfully making a phone call as to that for the cellular phone directly country where the vehicle is purchased 1 800 528 2069 for the U S 1 877 213 4525 for Canada 55 14 3454 for Mexico City and 1 800 712 3040 for outside N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107 Mexico City in Mexico Please refer to the 24 Hour Towing Assistance coverage details on the DVD in the Warranty Information Booklet and the 24 Hour Towing Assistance references e If supported this number may be programmable on some systems To do this press the button and say Setup followed by Towing Assistance Paging To learn how to page refer to Working with Automated Systems Paging works properly except for pagers of certain com
235. he amp button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook New Entry e When prompted say the name of the new entry Use of long names helps the voice recognition and it is recommended For example say Robert Smith or Robert instead of Bob 98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id e When prompted enter the number designation e g Home Work Mobile or Pager This will allow you to store multiple numbers for each phonebook entry if desired e When prompted recite the phone number for the phonebook entry that you are adding After you are finished adding an entry into the phone book you will be given the opportunity to add more phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the main menu The uconnect phone will allow you to enter up to 32 names in the phonebook with each name having up to four associated phone numbers and designations Each language has a separate 32 name phonebook accessible only in that language In addition if equipped and supported by your phone uconnect phone automati cally downloads your cellular phone s phonebook Phonebook Download Automatic Phonebook Transfer From Cellular Phone If equipped and specifically supported by your phone uconnect phone automatically downloads names text names and number entries from the cellular phone s phonebook Specific Bluetooth Phones with Phone Book Access Profile may support th
236. he MIL symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 385 5 Approximately 15 seconds later one of two things will happen a The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed to the I M station b The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I M station If your OBD II system is not ready you should see your authorized dealer or repair facility If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to update A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready Regardless of whether your vehicle s OBD II system is ready or not if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced before going to the I M station The I M station can fail your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running REPLACEMENT PARTS Use of genuine MOPAR parts for normal scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en sure the designed performance Damage or failures caused
237. he engine transmission or clutch To maintain a safe speed and prolong brake life shift down to second or first gear when descending a steep erade When turning a corner or driving up a steep grade down shift early so that the engine will not be overburdened AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE IF EQUIPPED NOTE The Continuously Variable Automatic Transaxle CVT changes ratios in a continuous manner This may sometimes feel as if it is slipping but this is normal and does not harm anything CAUTION Damage to the transaxle may occur if the following precautions are not observed e Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop e Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle speed Do not shift from REVERSE PARK or NEUTRAL into any forward gear when the engine is above idle speed Before shifting into any gear make sure your foot is firmly on the brake pedal NOTE You MUST press and hold the brake pedal down while shifting out of PARK 284 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id WARNING It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when you
238. he following may occur e The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abra sions and or skin reddening to the driver and front 66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor They are not caused by contact with chemicals They are not permanent and normally heal quickly However if you haven t healed significantly within a few days or if you have any blistering see your doctor Do not drive your vehicle after the airbags have de ployed If you are involved in another collision the airbags will not be in place to protect you WARNING Deployed airbags and seat belt pretensioners cannot immediately As the airbags deflate you may see some smoke like particles The particles are a normal by product of the process that generates the non toxic gas used for airbag inflation These airborne particles may irritate the skin eyes nose or throat If you have skin or eye irritation rinse the area with cool water For nose or throat irritation move to fresh air If the irritation continues see your doctor If these particles settle on your clothing follow the garment manufacturer s in structions for cleaning protect you in another collision Have the airbags seat belt pretensioners and the front passenger seat belt retractor assembly replaced by an authorized
239. he low and slow method 300 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id CAUTION e Check for accumulations of plants or brush These things could be a fire hazard or they might hide Muddy waters can reduce the cooling system effec damage to fuel lines brake hoses axle pinion seals tiveness by depositing debris onto the radiator and propeller shafts a e After extended operation in mud sand water or Aner Driving Orerioad similar dirty conditions have brake drums and rotors brake linings and axle yokes inspected and cleaned as soon as possible Off road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than does most on road driving After driving off road it is always a good idea to check for damage e If you experience unusual vibration after driving in mud slush or similar conditions check the wheels for packed material Packed foreign material can cause a wheel imbalance and cleaning the wheels will correct e Check threaded fasteners for looseness particularly on the situation the chassis drivetrain components steering and sus pension Retighten them if required and torque to the values specified in the Service Manual e Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle Check tires body structure steering suspension and exhaust system for damage ee STARTING AND OPERATING 301 WARNING Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause excessive wear or unpredictable braking You might not have full braking powe
240. he uconnect phone Voice Training feature may be used To enter this training mode follow one of the two following proce dures From outside the uconnect phone mode e g from radio mode e Press and hold the m button for five seconds until the session begins or e Press the button and say the Setup Voice Train ing command Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the uconnect phone For best results the Voice Training session should be completed when the vehicle is parked with the engine running all windows closed and the blower fan switched off This procedure may be repeated with a new user The system will adapt to the last trained voice only To restore the Voice Recognition system to factory default settings enter the Voice Training session via the above procedure and follow the prompts Voice Recognition VR e For best performance adjust the rearview mirror to provide at least 1 2 in 1 cm gap between the overhead console if equipped and the mirror e Always wait for the beep before speaking e Speak normally without pausing just as you would speak to a person sitting a few feet meters away from you e Make sure that no one other than you is speaking during a voice recognition period e Performance is maximized under e low to medium blower setting e low to medium vehicle speed e low road noise e smooth road surface e fully closed windows e dry weather condition
241. he vehicle When ERM determines that the rate of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicles speed are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift it applies the brake of the appropriate wheel and may also reduce engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur ERM will only intervene during very severe or evasive driving maneuvers ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring during severe or evasive driving maneuvers It can not prevent wheel lift due to other factors such as road conditions leaving the roadway or striking objects or other vehicles NOTE Anytime the ESC system is in the Full Off mode ERM is disabled Refer to Electronic Stability Control ESC for a complete explanation of the avail able ESC modes WARNING Many factors such as vehicle loading road condi tions and driving conditions influence the chance that wheel lift or roll over may occur ERM cannot prevent all wheel lift or roll overs especially those that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects or other vehicles Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ERM equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopar dize the user s safety or the safety of others Hill Descent Control HDC If Equipped This system maintains vehicle speed while descending hills during off road driving situations HDC will auto
242. hen properly set the compass will automatically account for this difference NOTE Magnetic and battery powered devices such as cell phones iPod s radar detectors PDA s and laptops should be kept away from the top of the instrument panel This is where the compass module is located and such devices may interfere and cause false compass readings 14 N A i a VY 12 040506040 fe Compass Variance Map NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 207 To Set the Variance With the ignition in the ON position quickly less than one second press and release the EVIC button several times until you have displayed the Per sonal Settings Customer Programmable Features menu Once in the Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features menu press and release less than one second the EVIC button several times until Compass Variance is displayed The Compass Variance message and the current variance zone number will be displayed To change the zone press and hold longer than two sec onds the EVIC button to increment the variance one step Repeat as necessary with individual long for at least 1 second EVIC button presses for each increment until the desired variance is achieved To exit the Vari ance Programming press the EVIC button with a short less than one second button press NOTE The factory default is Zone 8 During program ming the zone value will wrap around from Zone 15 to Zone 1
243. ht if necessary In the rear seat you may have trouble tightening the lap shoulder belt on the child restraint because the buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path opening on the restraint Disconnect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short buckle end of the belt several times to shorten it Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the release button facing out If the belt still can t be tightened or if pulling and pushing on the restraint loosens the belt disconnect the latch plate from the buckle turn the latch plate 74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie around and insert the latch plate into the buckle again If you still can t make the child restraint secure try a different seating position Children too Large for Booster Seats Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback should use the lap shoulder belt in a rear seat e Make sure that the child is upright in the seat e The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug as possible e Check belt fit periodically A child s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of position e If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck move the child closer to the center of the vehicle Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTIN
244. icle turn off the engine and allow it to cool the event of engine malfunction particularly involving Service including a tune up to manufacturers specifica engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance tions should be obtained immediately have your vehicle serviced promptly Continued opera tion of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat resulting in possible Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition To minimize the possibility of catalyst damage damage to the converter and the vehicle when the transaxle is in gear and the vehicle is in motion WARNING e Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the vehicle A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over materials that can burn Such materials might be e Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust disconnected for a prolonged period system Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 397 Cooling System WARNING e When working near the radiator cooling fan dis connect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition switch to the OFF position The fan is temperature controlled and can start at any time the ignition switch is in the ON position You or others can be badly burned by hot coolant or steam from your radiator If you see or hear
245. id if necessary to maintain the proper level N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 407 Frequency Of Fluid Change Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for the proper maintenance intervals Appearance Care and Protection from Corrosion Protection of Body and Paint from Corrosion Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo graphic locations and usage Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle Outside parking which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on paint metal trim and under body protection The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle What Causes Corrosion Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle The most common causes of corrosion are e Road salt dirt and moisture accumulation e Stone and gravel impact e Insects tree sap and tar e Salt in the air near sea coast localities e Atmospheric fallout industrial pollutants Washing e Wash your vehicle regularly Always wash your ve hicle in the shade using MOPAR Car Wash or a mild car wash soap and rinse the panels co
246. if necessary Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 436 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M 78 000 Miles 130 000 km or 84 000 Miles 140 000 km or 84 Months Maintenance Service 78 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter 11 Change the engine oil and engine oil Rotate tires filter If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the J Rotate tires engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 437 96 000 Mile
247. il Chance Indicator sresti sanesa at He 200 OU Chanee Indicator Reset a 232m coded eads 200 Oi ENIDE 2c 794941922 EED bud 633 3 387 421 Sch ns veces ae eos oo eee m 421 Change Interval sies ER 94 eR OR ded de DA 388 Much A C HE 387 DuSposal 23395 0824 BREER 444 HORE OR KEER 389 DIE 222 3909 9295249 2 24 5 5 390 dentilication LOBO 4244 ERLA EER RD 388 Materials Added to 0 000004 389 Recommendation s 388 421 PNEU sa mque S ps IERE bed Hens Rd 389 peg Rm 389 Onboard Diagnostic System 383 384 Opener Garage Door HomeLink lol Operator Manual Owner s Manual 5 METING P 286 Overheating EBBIBE 2s acie 8k eh chad 191 366 Owner s Manual Operator Manual 5 451 kie MP ETA EK 407 Dang Alarni 12252353 52031543 a kapisan E 22 PEKO DOKE so eur dg ex RS 30 oe a 303 Passie Liesl PCT rmm 142 Personol erg aca sae a THEA AS a RE 203 Pele eh AA AA ORR AMOR ee RE ee aS 2 He 79 Phone Cellular 22292 DEER REPERI S 92 Phone Hands Free uconnect LLL 92 Placard Tire and Loading Information 322 N INDEX 467 Power Door LOCKS i re uoa bo SERE PRES EE RE es 28 MTO 43039359493 5 59 i MEUS ODE AAR 89 Outlet Auxiliary Electrical Outlet 161 le ME as ba pa A un EA ee tata 9 d S Ho 301 302 suc Cm 158 Vis Gr UM a soos e sore qoe q HEN Rud GS esa 406 WWHGOWS sss RE TRE ARE ARE DAE ER UTE 32
248. ill be set at the same volume level as last played NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 229 SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it TIME Button Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time and radio frequency Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait five seconds RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM or FM frequencies TUNE Control Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob t
249. ing system To prevent scalding or injury do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle Personal injury or en gine damage may result Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your community To prevent ingestion by ani mals or children do not store ethylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground If ingested by a child or pet seek emergency assistance immediately Clean up any ground spills immediately Coolant Level The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for determining that the coolant level is adequate With the engine idling and warm to normal operating tempera ture the level of the engine coolant antifreeze in the bottle should be between the ADD and FULL lines shown on the bottle The radiator normally remains completely full so there is no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for the coolant freeze point or replacing the engine coolant antifreeze Advise your service attendant of this As N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 401 long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month When additional
250. ion switch to the LOCK position wait 10 to 15 sec onds then repeat the Normal Starting procedure Normal Starting Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine does not require pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal Simply turn the ignition switch to the START position and release when the engine starts If the engine fails to start within 15 seconds turn the ignition switch to the OFF position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the Normal Starting procedure WARNING Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans axle cannot be started this way Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started ignite and damage the converter and vehicle If the vehicle has a discharged battery booster cables may be used to obtain a start from another vehicle This type of start can be dangerous if done improp erly so follow the procedure carefully Refer to Section 6 of this manual for jump starting instruc tions Extreme Cold Weather Below 20 F Or 29 C To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures use of an externally powered electric engine block heater avail able from your authorized dealer is recommended 280 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id CAUTION To prevent damage to the starter do not crank the If Engine Fails to Start If the engine fails to start after you have followed the Normal Starting
251. ire pressures vary with temperature changes Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi 7 kPa per 12 F 7 C of air temperature change Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage especially in the Winter Example If garage temperature 68 F 20 C and the outside temperature 32 F 0 C then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi 21 kPa which equals 1 psi 7 kPa for every 12 F 7 C for this outside temperature condition Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi 13 to 40 kPa during operation Do not reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 329 Tire Pressures for High Speed Operation Radial Ply Tires The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds within posted speed limits Where speed limits or condi Hons are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be reguired for high speed vehicle opera tion Refer to original eguipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds loading and cold tire inflation pressures Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly The instability could cause an accident Al ways use radial ply tires in sets of four Never combine them with other types of tires
252. is activated the Vehicle Security Alarm provides both audio and visual signals The horn will sound the headlights park lamps and or turn signals will flash repeatedly for three minutes If the disturbance is still present driver s door passenger door other doors ignition after three minutes the parking lights and tail lights will flash for an additional 15 minutes To Set The Security Alarm 1 Remove the key from the ignition switch and get out of the vehicle 2 Lock the door using either the power door LOCK switch or the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter and close all doors 3 The Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster will flash rapidly for approximately 16 seconds This shows that the Vehicle Security Alarm is arming During this period if a door is opened the ignition switch is turned ON or the power door locks are unlocked in any manner the Vehicle Security Alarm will automatically NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19 disarm After approximately 16 seconds the Vehicle Security Light will flash slowly This shows that the Vehicle Security Alarm is fully armed To Disarm The System Press UNLOCK on the RKE transmitter or insert the key into the ignition switch and turn the ignition switch to the ON position Vehicle Security Alarm Manual Override The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock the doors using the manual door lock plunger REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RKE IF
253. is feature See uconnect website for supported phones e To call a name from downloaded or uconnect Phonebook follow the procedure in Call by Saying a Name section e Automatic download and update if supported begins as soon as the Bluetooth wireless phone connection is made to the uconnect phone for example after you start the vehicle e A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be down loaded and updated every time a phone is connected to the uconnect phone N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99 e Depending on the maximum number of entries down loaded there may be a short delay before the latest downloaded names can be used Until then if avail able the previous downloaded phonebook is available for use e Only the phonebook of the currently connected cellu lar phone is accessible e Only the cellular phone s phonebook is downloaded SIM card phonebook is not part of the Mobile phone book e This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or deleted on the uconnect phone These can only be edited on the cellular phone The changes are trans ferred and updated to uconnect phone on the next phone connection Phonebook Download Single Entry If equipped and supported by your phone uconnect phone allows the user to download entries from their phone via Bluetooth To use this feature press the button and say Phonebook Download The system prompts Ready to accept
254. is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With UConnect message will display on the radio screen TIME Button Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time and radio frequency Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait five seconds The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button For vehicles equipped with satellite radio press the SETUP button use the TUNE SCROLL control to select SET CLOCK and then follow the above procedure starting at Step 2 For vehicles not equipped with satellite radio press the SETUP button and then follow the above procedure starting at Step 2 INFO Button Press the INFO button for an RDS station one with call letters displayed The radio will return a Radio Text message broadcast from an FM station FM mode only RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM or FM frequencies NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 239 TUNE
255. isplay will time out in two minutes Press any button on the radio to exit this screen ESN SID Access With REN RER RBZ Radios While in SAT mode press the MENU button on the radio faceplate Next touch the SUBSCRIPTION tab on the touch screen All the ESNs that apply to your vehicle will display ESN SID Access With REU Radio While in SAT mode press the MENU button on the radio faceplate Next turn the knob surrounding the joystick in the center of the radio to scroll to Subscription and then press and release the joystick All of the ESNs that apply to your vehicle will display Selecting uconnect studios Satellite Mode Press the SAT button until SAT appears in the display A CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio mode N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 255 Satellite Antenna To ensure optimum reception do not place items on the roof around the rooftop antenna location or strap items to the trunk lid around the trunk lid antenna if equipped Metal objects placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause decreased performance Larger lug gage items such as bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible within the loading design of the rack Do not place items directly on or above the antenna Reception Quality Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the following reasons e The vehicle is parked in an underground parking structure or under a physical obstacle
256. it is programmed It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases The garage door may open and close while you train NOTE e Some gate operators and garage door openers may require you to replace Step 3 with procedures noted in the Gate Operator Canadian Programming section 154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE e After training a HomeLink channel if the garage door does not operate with HomeLink and the ga rage door opener was manufactured after 1995 the garage door opener may have a rolling code If so proceed to the heading Programming A Rolling Code System 4 Press and hold the just trained HomeLink button and observe the indicator light If the indicator light stays on constantly programming is complete and the garage door or device should activate when the HomeLink button is pressed If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds and then turns to a constant light continue with program ming for a Rolling Code 5 PROGRAMMING A ROLLING CODE SYSTEM At the garage door opener motor in the garage locate the Learn or Training button This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the garage door opener motor it is NOT the button normally used to open and close the door 1 Garage Door Opener 2 Training Button N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155 6 Firmly press and release the LEARN or TRAINING but
257. itch are recommended for heavier Tongue Weights TW and may be reguired depending on Vehicle and Trailer configuration loading to comply with Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR requirements Trailer Hitch Classification Your vehicle may be factory equipped for safe towing of trailers weighing over 2 000 lbs 907 kg with the optional Trailer Tow Prep Package See your authorized dealer for package content The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings chart for the maximum GTW towable for your given drivetrain Industry Standards Class II Medium Dut 3 500 Ibs 1587 kg Class III Heavy Dut 5 000 Ibs 2268 kg Class IV Extra Heavy 10 000 Ibs 4540 kg Dut Fifth Wheel Gooseneck Greater than 10 000 lbs 4540 ke Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight GTW towable for your given drivetrain All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle 356 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain Engine Transmission 2 0L Auto Man 2 4L Aut
258. ition switch is on You can be hurt by the fan Remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or 11 Check the tire pressure as soon as possible Correct bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical the tire pressure as required contact You could be seriously injured B fluid i rrosive acid solution th n JUMP STARTING PROCEDURES attery u d is a corrosive acid solution t at ca cause serious burns do not allow battery fluid to Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it contact eyes skin or clothing Wear safety glasses started Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmis l and protect your eyes at all times If acid splashes sion cannot be started this way Also there is a greater l l a in eyes or on skin flush contaminated area imme risk of an accident when a vehicle is being pushed or diately with laite duantites of water towed If the vehicle has a discharged battery booster y 5e q cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster Continued stop could injure the occupants in the vehicle Have the deflated flat tire repaired or replaced immedi ately 374 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES NN Id WARNING Continued e A battery generates hydrogen gas which is flam mable and explosive Keep flame or spark away from the vent holes Do not lean over battery when attaching clamps or allow the clamps to touch each other Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source that has a great
259. its 3 Route the shoulder belt to the inside of the right head stowed position in the right rear side trim panel restraint oe ans na ria Ee see Mini Latch Stowage Routing The Rear Center Shoulder Belt 2 Grasp the mini latch plate and pull the belt over the seat THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45 N 6 When the belt is long enough to fit insert the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click 022606149 Routing The Rear Center Shoulder Belt 4 When the belt is long enough to fit insert the mini latch plate into the mini buckle until you hear a click Connecting Mini Latch To Buckle 5 Sit back in the seat Slide the regular latch plate up the 7 Position the lap e MES AR ENS below sed webbing as far as necessary to allow the belt to go around abdomen To remove slack in the lap belt portion pull up your lap 46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE on the shoulder belt To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight 9 To release the belt push the red button on the buckle pull on the lap belt A snug belt reduces the risk of sliding HE ER ee nee Er ds man under the belt in a collision ees Detaching Mini Latch and Buckle 10 To disengage the mini latch from the mini buckle for Rear Center Seat Belt Buckled storage insert the regular latch plate into the black 8 Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is button on the top of the mini
260. its self check cycle to ensure that the ABS working properly This self check occurs each time the vehicle is started and accelerated past 7 mph 11 km h ABS is activated during braking under certain road or stopping conditions ABS inducing conditions can in clude ice snow gravel bumps railroad tracks loose debris or panic stops 308 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE id You may also experience the following when the brake system goes into anti lock mode e the ABS motor running it may continue to run for a short time after the stop e the clicking sound of solenoid valves e brake pedal pulsations e a slight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the end of the stop These are all normal characteristics of ABS WARNING The Anti Lock Brake System ABS contains sophis ticated electronic equipment that may be susceptible to interference caused by improperly installed or high output radio transmitting equipment This in terference can cause possible loss of Anti Lock brak ing capability Installation of such equipment should be performed by qualified professionals All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and type and tires must be properly inflated to produce accurate signals for the computer ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM Your vehicle may be equipped with an optional ad vanced electronic brake control system that includes Anti Lock Brake System ABS Brake Assist System BAS Traction Control Sys
261. k when it is inflated N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65 Because airbag sensors estimate deceleration over time vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of whether or not an airbag should have deployed NOTE In a rollover the pretensioners and or SABIC airbags may deploy on both sides of the vehicle Front and Side Impact Sensors In front and side impacts impact sensors aid the ORC in determining appropriate response to impact events Ad ditional sensors in the ORC determine the level of airbag deployment and provide verification Enhanced Accident Response System In the event of an impact causing airbag deployment if the communication network remains intact and the power remains intact depending on the nature of the event the ORC will determine whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform the follow ing functions e Cut off fuel to the engine e Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is turned off e Turn on the interior lights which remain on as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is removed e Unlock the doors automatically If a Deployment Occurs The airbags are designed to deflate immediately after deployment NOTE Front and or side airbags will not deploy in all collisions This does not mean something is wrong with the airbag system If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags any or all of t
262. l operation after turning on the ignition switch the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a bulb check If the light remains on after the bulb check it indicates that there is a problem with the electronics In addition if the Vehicle Security Light begins to flash after the bulb check it indicates that someone used an invalid key to try to start the engine Either of these conditions will result in the engine being shut off after two seconds 16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id CAUTION Always remove the Sentry Keys from the vehicle If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal vehicle operation vehicle running for longer than 10 sec onds it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics Should this occur have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by an authorized dealer NOTE The Sentry Key Immobilizer System is not compatible with some aftermarket remote starting sys tems Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics Replacement Keys NOTE Only keys that are programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle Once a Sentry Key is programmed to a vehicle it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unat tended At the time of pur
263. ldren are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front WARNING In a collision an unrestrained child even a tiny baby can become a projectile inside the vehicle The force required to hold even an infant on your lap could become so great that you could not hold the child no matter how strong you are The child and others could be badly injured Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child s size N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71 Infants and Child Restraints There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt Always check the child seat owner s manual to ensure you have the correct seat for your child Use the restraint that is correct for your child e Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward facing in the vehicle until they are at least one year old and weigh at least 20 Ibs 9 kg Two types of child restraints can be used rearward facing infant carriers and convertible child seats Both types of child re straints are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system Refer to LATCH Child Seat Anchorage System Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren in this section e The infant carrier is only used rearward facing in the vehicle It is recommended for children who weigh up to about 20 lb
264. lean forward before lifting the WORDING handle then lean back to the desired position and release Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the the handle Lift the handle to return the seatback to an shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest upright position In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and be seriously or even fatally injured Use the recliner only when the vehicle is parked 030907662 Reclining Seat UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129 Six Way Power Seats If Eduipped The power seat switch is located on the outboard side of WARNING the seat near the floor Use the switch to move the seat up Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is down forward rearward or to tilt the seat dangerous The sudden movement of the seat could cause you to lose control The seat belt might not be properly adjusted and you could be injured Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is parked CAUTION DO NOT place any article under a power seat or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat controls Seat travel may become limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat s path 030907663 Power Seat Switch 130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Heated Seats If Eduipped This feature heats the front driver and passenger seats The heaters provide the same heat level for both the seat cushion and the seatback The control
265. leaner filter replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the CV joints Perform the first inspection at 12 000 miles 20 000 km or 12 months Inspect exhaust system Perform the first inspection at 12 000 miles 20 000 km or 12 months Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 430 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M 18 000 Miles 30 000 km or 24 000 Miles 40 000 km or 24 Months Maintenance Service 18 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter m 11 Change the engine oil and engine oil I Rotate tires filter L1 If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the J Rotate tires engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Re
266. lind you Do not allow battery fluid to contact your eyes skin or clothing Do not lean over a battery when attaching clamps If acid splashes in eyes or on skin flush the area imme diately with large amounts of water Battery gas is flammable and explosive Keep flame or sparks away from the battery Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output greater than 12 Volts Do not allow cable clamps to touch each other Battery posts terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds Wash hands after handling Continued should not be disconnected and should only be replaced with a battery of the same type vented CAUTION e It is essential when replacing the cables on the battery that the positive cable is attached to the positive post and the negative cable is attached to the negative post Battery posts are marked posi tive and negative and are identified on the battery case Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts and free of corrosion If a fast charger is used while the battery is in the vehicle disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery Do not use a fast charger to provide starting voltage 392 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Air Conditioner Maintenance WARNING For best possible performance your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer e Use only refrigerants and com
267. ll allow the user to scroll through the following items and set defaults according to customer preference Menu Language If Equipped Selecting this item will allow the user to choose the default startup DVD menu language effective only if language supported by disc If you want to select a language not listed then scroll down and select other Enter the four digit country code using the TUNE SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the number and then push to select Audio Language If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose a default audio language effective only if the language is supported by the disc You can select a language not listed by scrolling N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 215 down and selecting other Enter the country code using the TUNE SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the number and then push to select Subtitle Language If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose a default subtitle language effective only if the language is supported by the disc You can select a language not listed by scrolling down and selecting other Enter the country code using the TUNE SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the number and then push to select Subtitles If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose between subtitle Off or On Audio DRC If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to limit maximum audio dynamic range
268. ll use the priority three cellular phone when you make a call You can select to use a lower priority cellular phone at any time refer to Advanced Phone Connectivity in this section Dial by Saying a Number e Press the amp button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Dial N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97 The system will prompt you to say the number you want to call For example you can say 234 567 8901 The uconnect phone will confirm the phone number and then dial The number will appear in the display of certain radios Call by Saying a Name Press the amp button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Call The system will prompt you to say the name of the person you want to call After the Ready prompt and the following beep say the name of the person you want to call For example you can say John Doe where John Doe is a previ ously stored name entry in the uconnect phonebook or downloaded phonebook To learn how to store a name in the phonebook refer to Add Names to Your uconnect Phonebook in the phonebook e The uconnect system will confirm the name and then dial the corresponding phone number which may appear in the display of certain radios Add Names to Your uconnect Phonebook NOTE Adding names to the uconnect phonebook is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion e Press t
269. lly loaded and ready for operation Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that it is not over the GVWR Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and shorten useful service life Heavier suspension compo nents do not necessarily increase the vehicle s GVWR Loading To load your vehicle properly first figure out its empty weight Store heavier items down low and be sure you distribute their weight as evenly as possible Stow all loose items securely before driving Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way the brakes operate CAUTION Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR If you do parts on your vehicle can break or it can change the way your vehicle handles This could cause you to lose control Also overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle NS TA TING AND OPERATING 353 TRAILER TOWING In this section you will find safety tips and information on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your vehicle Before towing a trailer carefully review this information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as possible To maintain warranty coverage follow the requirements and recommendations in this manual concerning ve hicles used for trailer towing Common Towing Definitions The following trailer towing related definitions will assist you in understanding the information Gross Vehicle Weight Rating G
270. m or 120 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the spark plugs Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Adjust the parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Replace rear drive assembly RDA fluid Replace power transfer unit PTU fluid Change the automatic transaxle fluid and filter Replace the accessory drive belt s O C O C O L L C LL L LL L Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 441 126 000 Miles 210 000 km or 126 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate tires Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 132 000 Miles 220 000 km or 132 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Replace the air con
271. mage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Engine Oil Viscosity SAE Grade SAE 5W 20 engine oil is recommended for all operating temperatures This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy Your engine oil filler cap also states the recommended engine oil viscosity grade for your engine Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num ber should not be used Synthetic Engine Oils You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom mended oil quality requirements are met and the recom mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are followed Materials Added to Engine Oils The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addi tion of any additives other than leak detection dyes to the engine oil Engine oil is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives Disposing Of Used Engine Oil and Oil Filters Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil filtersfrom your vehicle Used oil and oil filters indiscriminately discarded can present a problem to the environment Contact your authorized dealer service station or governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area 390 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id WARNING The air cleaner can provide a measure of protection in the case of engine back
272. mally and will not require towing 196 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CAUTION 26 Hill Descent Indicator If Equipped amp The symbol illuminates is armed when the Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause y 4WD Lock switch is activated and the trans damage to the engine control system It also could mission range indicator is in LOW or REVERSE affect fuel economy and drivability If the MIL is position Off Road Mode flashing severe catalytic converter damage and 27 Front Fog Light Indicator If Equipped power loss will soon occur Immediate service is This indi jl illumi NE f ad O is Indicator will illuminate when the front tog i cd lights are on WARNING 28 Electronic Stability Control ESC OFF Indicator Light If Equipped A malfunctioning catalytic converter as referenced This light indicates the Electronic Stability Con above can reach higher temperatures than in normal ee trol system ESC has been turned off by the operating conditions This can cause a fire if you OFF driver drive slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry plants or wood or cardboard etc This could result in death or serious injury to the driver occu pants or others 29 Electronic Stability Control ESC Malfunction Indicator Light If Equipped The ESC Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position It should go out
273. mands Repeat to repeat a memo Next to play the next memo Previous to play the previous memo Delete to delete a memo e Delete All to delete all memos Language German Language Dutch Language Italian Language English Language French Language Spanish Tutorial Voice Training NOTE Keep in mind that you have to press the button first and wait for the beep before speaking the Barge In commands NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125 Voice Training For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog nizing their voice commands or numbers the uconnect voice Voice Training feature may be used 1 Press the 4 button say System Setup and once you are in that menu then say Voice Training This will train your own voice to the system and will improve recognition 2 Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by uconnect voice For best results the Voice Training session should be completed when the vehicle is parked engine running all windows closed and the blower fan switched off This procedure may be repeated with a new user The system will adapt to the last trained voice only SEATS Seats are a primary part of the Occupant Restraint System of the vehicle They need to be used properly for safe operation of the vehicle WARNING e DO NOT allow people to ride in any area of yo
274. matic transaxle fluid and filter should be changed if you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45 minutes of continuous operation Refer to the Main tenance Schedule in Section 8 for the proper mainte nance intervals NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 363 Electronic Speed Control If Eguipped Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads When using the speed control if you experience speed drops greater than 10 mph 16 km h disengage until you can get back to cruising speed Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to maximize fuel efficiency Cooling System To reduce the potential for engine and transaxle over heating take the following actions City Driving When stopped for short periods of time shift the trans axle into NEUTRAL but do not increase engine idle speed Highway Driving Reduce speed Air Conditioning Turn off temporarily 364 STARTING AND OPERATING RECREATIONAL TOWING BEHIND MOTORHOME ETC Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle Flat Towing With All Four Wheels On The Ground Recreational Towing Condition Four Wheel Flat Manual Trans Automatic axle Vehicles Transaxle Vehicles Yes Never Tow All Wheels on Ground Two Wheel Dolly Never Never Tow Front or Rear Wheels on Ground Flat Bed Tow All Wheels on Bed of Truck NOTE Vehicles equipped with manual transaxles may be recreationally towed flat towed at any l
275. mation 240 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following format types Program Type 16 Digit Character Display No program type or Adult Hits Classical Classic Rock College Countr D Pun add S ME OER EE EE reader Foreign Language Information Jazz News NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 241 station with the same selected Music Type name The Music Type function only operates when in the FM mode If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset station SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between the following items e Set Clock Pressing the SELECT button will allow you to set the clock Adjust the hours by turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob After adjusting the hours press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save time change AM FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET RND button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release tha
276. message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position To turn off the message temporarily press and release the Trip Odometer button on the instrument cluster To reset the oil change indicator system after performing the scheduled maintenance refer to the fol lowing procedure 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position Do not start the engine 2 Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds 3 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF LOCK position NOTE If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle the oil change indicator system did not reset If necessary repeat this procedure NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 201 EVIC Functions EE 041006982 EVIC Button Press the EVIC button until one of the following func tions is displayed on the EVIC e Compass Temperature Audio e Average Fuel Economy e Distance To Empty DTE Elapsed Time Tire Pressure Monitor TPM Personal Settings To Reset The Display Pressing and holding the EVIC button once will clear the function currently being displayed Reset will only occur if a resettable function is currently being displayed To reset all resettable functions press and release the EVIC button a second time within three seconds of resetting the currently displayed function Reset ALL will be dis played during this three second window 202 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INS
277. mote control to scroll up and down the menu if equipped e DISC Play Pause You can toggle between playing the DVD and pausing the DVD by pushing the SELECT button if equipped e DVD Play Options Selecting the DVD Play Options will display the following e Subtitle Repeatedly pressing SELECT will switch subtitles to different subtitle languages that are available on the disc if equipped e Audio Stream Repeatedly pressing SELECT will switch to different audio languages if supported on the disc if equipped e Angle Repeatedly pressing SELECT will change the viewing angle if supported by the DVD disc if equipped 214 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id NOTE e The available selections for each of the above entries varies depending upon the disc e These selections can only be made while playing a DVD e VESTM Power Allows you to tum VESTM ON and OFF if eguipped e VESTM Lock Locks out rear VESTM remote controls if equipped e VES CHI CH2 Allows the user to change the mode of either the IR1 or IR2 wireless headphones by pressing the AUDIO SELECT button if equipped e Set Home Clock Pressing the SELECT button allows you to set the clock Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to adjust the hours and then press and turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to adjust the minutes Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob again to save changes e Player Defaults Selecting this item wi
278. mpletely with clear water 408 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id e If insects tar or other similar deposits have accumu Special Care lated on your vehicle use MOPAR Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover or equivalent to remove e If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near the ocean hose off the undercarriage at least once e Use a high quality cleaner wax such as MOPAR a month Cleaner Wax to remove road film stains and to protect your paint finish Take care never to scratch the paint t is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of the doors rocker panels and trunk be kept clear and e Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing open that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish e If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint touch them up immediately The cost of such repairs is CAUTION considered the responsibility of the owner e If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or similar cause which destroys the paint and protective coating have your vehicle repaired as soon as pos sible The cost of such repairs is considered the respon sibility of the owner Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such as steel wool or scouring powder which will scratch metal and painted surfaces N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 409 e If you carry special cargo such as chemicals fertilizers de icer salt etc be sure that such materials are well packaged and seal
279. n 222 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id SCAN Button Auxiliary Mode Operating Instructions Voice Recognition No function System VR If Eguipped EJECT Button Auxiliary Mode For the radio refer to Voice Recognition System VR in No function Section 3 For uconnect Voice Recognition System VR refer to uconnect phone in Section 3 Operating Instructions uconnect phone If Equipped Refer to uconnect phone in Section 3 TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press the TIME button to change the display from elapsed playing time to time of day The time of day will display for five seconds Operating Instructions uconnect studios ins Satellite Radio If Equipped SEE Auxiliary mode Refer to uconnect studios Satellite Radio in this No function section SET Button Auxiliary Mode I e Z Vi E No function Operating nstructions ideo Entertainment System VES TM If Equipped Refer to separate Video Entertainment System VES Guide NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 223 Dolby Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Dolby and the double D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Macrovision This product incorporates copyright protection technol ogy that is protected by U S patents and other intellec tual property rights Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision and i
280. n a sufficient length of time to allow the generator to recharge the vehicle s battery N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163 POWER INVERTER IF EGUIPPED A 115 Volt 150 Watt AC power inverter is located on the front of the center console for added convenience This outlet can power cellular phones electronics and other low power devices requiring power up to 150 Watts Certain high end video games such as Playstation3 and XBox360 will exceed this power limit as will most power tools The power inverter is designed with built in overload protection If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded the power inverter will automatically shut down Once the electrical device has been removed from the outlet the inverter should automatically reset If the power rating exceeds approximately 170 Watts the power inverter may have to be reset manually To reset the inverter manually unplug the device and plug it in again To avoid overloading the circuit check the power ratings on electrical devices prior to using the inverter 035006145 115 Volt Power Outlet 164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id WARNING CAUTION To avoid serious injury or death e Many accessories that can be plugged in draw Do not use a three prong adaptor power from the vehicle s battery even when not in Do not insert any objects into the receptacles use i e cellular phones etc Eventually if Da not touch with wet ha
281. n it is active This is normal the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESC activation ESC Operating Modes The ESC system has three available operating modes for four wheel drive equipped vehicles and two available operating modes for two wheel drive equipped vehicles Full On Four Wheel Drive Models or On Two Wheel Drive Models This is the normal operating mode for ESC Whenever the vehicle is started the ESC system will be in this On mode This mode should be used for most driving situations ESC should only be turned to Partial Off or ESC Off for specific reasons as noted below Partial Off Four Wheel Drive Models or On Two Wheel Drive Models This mode is entered by momentarily pressing the ESC Off switch When in Partial Off mode the ESC Off Indicator Light will be illuminated This mode is in tended to be used if the vehicle is in deep snow sand or gravel conditions and more wheel spin than ESC would normally allow is required to gain traction To turn ESC on again momentarily press the ESC Off switch This will restore the normal ESC On mode of operation NOTE To improve the vehicle s traction when driving with snow chains or starting off in deep snow sand or gravel it may be desirable to switch to the Partial Off mode by pressing the ESC Off switch Once the situa tion requiring ESC to be switched to the Parti
282. n tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road charac teristics and climate Traction Grades The Traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C These grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor mance WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics 454 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE NN Id Temperature Grades WARNING The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat The temperature grade for this tire is established for and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory Excessive speed under inflation or excessive load test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause
283. nd Row Center Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions eo ko ome ch 3e R 43 3 Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure 47 H Automatic Locking Retractors ALR Mode If Equipped O Seat Belt Pretensioners If Equipped O Supplemental Rear Impact Active Head Restraints AHR O Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System DeltAler 9 siek 4 4 48404 ee RR Cheeks 02 O Seat belt Extender sss opas ue MEE VAR HE ns 53 O Seat Belts And Pregnant Women 54 D Supplemental Restraint System SRS AUDI M Wc 54 O Advanced Front Airbag Features 56 O Airbag Deployment Sensors And Controls D Event Data Recorder EDR D Child Restraint ll Engine Break In Recommendations ll Safety Tips D Transporting Passengers o Exhaust Gas O Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle O Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11 4 61 12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS The authorized dealer that sold you your new vehicle has the key code numbers for your vehicle locks These numbers can be used to order duplicate keys Ask your authorized dealer for these numbers and keep them in a safe place 8163e6a8 Vehicle Key Ignition Key Removal Automatic Transmission If Equipped 1 Place the shift lever in PARK 2 Turn the ignition switch to the ACC Accessory position 3 Push the key an
284. nd apply more power as you start up the hill Do not race forward into a steep grade the abrupt change of grade could cause you to lose control If the front end begins to bounce ease off the throttle slightly to bring all four tires back on the ground As you approach the crest of the hill ease off the throttle and slowly proceed over the top If the wheels start to slip as you approach the crest of a hill ease off the accelerator and maintain headway by turning the steering wheel no more than a 1 4 turn quickly back and forth This will provide a fresh bite into the surface and will usually provide enough traction to complete the climb If you do not make it to the top place the vehicle in REVERSE and back straight down the grade using engine resistance along with the vehicle brakes ee STARTING AND OPERATING 297 WARNING Never attempt to climb a hill at an angle or turn around on a steep grade Driving across an incline increases the risk of a rollover which may result in severe injury Driving Down Hill Before driving down a steep hill you need to determine if it is too steep for a safe descent What is the surface traction Is the grade too steep to maintain a slow controlled descent Are there obstacles Is it a straight descent Is there plenty of distance at the base of the hill to regain control if the vehicle descends to fast If you feel confident in your ability to proceed then make sure you are in low L Off Road wi
285. nd collision The child could be badly injured or Tether for CHildren in this section killed Follow the manufacturer s directions ex e The belt positioning booster seat is for children weigh actly when installing a infant or child restraint ing more than 40 lbs 18 kg but who are still too small A rearward facing child restraint should only be to fit the vehicle s seat belts properly If the child used in a rear seat A rearward facing child re cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle s cushion straint in the front seat map be struck by a deploy while the child s back is against the seatback they ing passenger airbag which may cause severe or should use a Belt Positioning Booster Seat The child fatal injury to the infant and booster seat are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73 Here are some tips on getting the most out of your child restraint e Before buying any restraint system make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards We also recommend that you make sure that you can install the child restraint in the vehicle where you will use it before you buy it e The restraint must be appropriate for your child s weight and height Check the label on the restraint for weight and height limits e Carefully follow the instructions that come with the restraint If you install the restraint improperly it may not work when
286. nd time to turn off the Hazard Warning flasher Do not use this emergency warning system when the vehicle is in motion Use it when your vehicle is disabled and is creating a safety hazard for other motorists If it is necessary to leave the vehicle to go for service the Hazard Warning flasher will continue to operate with the ignition key removed and the vehicle locked NOTE With extended use the Hazard Warning flasher may wear down your battery IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS In any of the following situations you can reduce the potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action e On the highways Slow down e In city traffic While stopped put the transmission in NEUTRAL but do not increase engine idle speed CAUTION Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your vehicle If the pointer rises to the H red mark the instrument cluster will sound a chime When safe pull over and stop the vehicle with the engine at idle Turn off the air conditioning and wait until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on the H red mark for more than a minute turn the engine off immediately and call for service NOTE There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition e If your air conditioner A C is on turn it off The A C system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning the A C off can help remove this heat e You can also turn the
287. nds plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent engine starting Accessories that draw higher power i e coolers vacuum cleaners lights etc will degrade the battery even more quickly Only use these inter mittently and with great caution After the use of high power draw accessories or long periods of the vehicle not being started with accessories still plugged in the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the generator to recharge the vehicle s battery Close the lid when not in use If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric shock and failure N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165 CUPHOLDERS There are two cupholders located in the back for the rear Your vehicle is equipped with four cupholders There are passengers two illuminated cupholders located in the front 0351 0621 5 Rear Cupholders ales Front Cupholders 166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id STORAGE To open the lower glove compartment pull outward on the release handle Glove Compartment And Storage Bin Located on the passenger side of the instrument panel are an upper storage bin and a lower glove compartment 035206143 Glove Compartment 035209107 1 Upper Storage Bin 2 Lower Glove Compartment Door Storage The interior door panels are eguipped with lower storage
288. ng and holding the SEEK button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in CD and MP3 modes TIME Button Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 233 RW FF Press and hold the FF Fast Forward button and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner AM FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button Random Play Button Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran domly selected track Press the RND button a second time to stop Random Play Notes on Playing MP3 Files The radio can play MP3 files however acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 files pay attention to the following restric tions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 and CDDA MP3 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the ra
289. ng and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subse quent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exists When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the sys tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of replacement or N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 193 alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly CAUTION The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on
290. ning Lights DRL at DRL intensity lower whenever the ignition is ON the engine is running the headlight switch is off the parking brake is off the turn signal is off and the shift lever is in any position except PARK Turn Signals Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights 031407551 Turn Signals NOTE If either light remains on and does not flash or there is a very fast flash rate check for a defective outside light bulb If an indicator fails to light when the lever is moved it would suggest that the indicator bulb is defective 142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Lane Change Assist Tap the lever up or down once without moving beyond the detent and the turn signal right or left will flash three times then automatically turn off High Low Beam Switch Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam Pull the multifunction lever toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam Flash to Pass You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you This will turn on the high beam headlights until the lever is released NOTE If the multifunction lever is held in the flash to pass position for more than 30 seconds the high beams will shut off If this occurs wait 30 seconds for the next
291. nly shows that the parking brake is ap plied It does not show the degree of brake application Always fully apply the parking brake when leav ing your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or injury Also be certain to leave an automatic transaxle in PARK a manual transaxle in RE VERSE or first gear Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury NS TA TING AND OPERATING 305 CAUTION If the Brake System Warning Light remains on with the parking brake released a brake system malfunc tion is indicated Have the brake system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately BRAKE SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with power assisted brakes as standard equipment In the event power assist is lost for any reason for example repeated brake applications with the engine off the brakes will still function How ever the effort required to brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required with the power system oper ating WARNING Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly an accident Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures excessive lining wear and possible brake damage You would not have your full braking capacity in an emergency If either of the two hydraulic systems lose normal capa bility the remaining system will still function with some loss of overall braking effectiveness This will
292. nob This will display the next e Preset 2 Artists sub menu list item on the iPod then you can follow the same steps to go to the desired track in that list Not all iPod sub menu levels are available on this e Preset 1 Playlists e Preset 3 Albums e Preset 4 Genres system e Preset 5 Audiobooks e MUSIC TYPE button The MUSIC TYPE button is another shortcut button to the genre listing on your e Preset 6 Podcasts iPode e Pressing a PRESET button will display the current list on the top line and the first item in that list on CAUTION the second line e Leaving the iPod or any supported device any e To Exit List mode without selecting a track press the where in the vehicle in extreme heat or cold can same PRESET button again to go back to Play alter the operation or damage the device Follow mode the device manufacturer s guidelines Continued NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 253 CAUTION Continued e Placing items on the iPod or connections to the iPod in the vehicle can cause damage to the device and or to the connectors WARNING Do not plug in or remove the iPod while driving Failure to follow this warning could result in an accident uconnect studios SATELLITE RADIO IF EQUIPPED REN REQ RER RES REU RBZ RADIOS ONLY Satellite radio uses direct satellite to receiver broadcast ing technology to provide clear digital sound coast to coast The subscri
293. nsmitter This feature can be turned on or turned off To change the current setting proceed as follows e For vehicles equipped with the EVIC refer to Sound Horn with Lock under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following steps 1 Press the LOCK button on a programmed RKE trans mitter for at least 4 seconds but no longer than 10 sec onds Then press the PANIC button while still holding the LOCK button 2 Release both buttons at the same time 3 Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter with the ignition switch in the LOCK position and the key removed 4 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Vehicle Security Alarm Opening a door with the Vehicle Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm 22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id Flash Lights With Remote Key Lock Unlock This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmit ter This feature can be turned on or turned off To change the current setting proceed as f
294. nsor s is not being received 81826bd7 Check TPM System Display If the ignition key is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists If the system fault no longer exists the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will no longer flash the CHECK TPM SYSTEM text message will not be present and a pressure value will be displayed instead of dashes A system fault can occur with any of the following scenarios 1 Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPM sensors 2 Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals 3 Snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPM sensors NOTE Your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare wheel and tire assembly 1 The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor Therefore the TPMS will not monitor the tire pressure in the compact spare tire NS TA TING AND OPERATING 343 2 If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition key cycle a chime will sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will still turn ON due to the low tire 3 However after driving the vehicle for up to 20 min utes above 15 mph 25 km h the Tire Pressure Moni toring Tellt
295. nstrument Panel Lens Cleaning 411 Integrated Power Module Fuses 412 Interior Appearance Cate 1224440546444 PR t 410 Intermittent Wipers Delay Wipers 145 INGPOCUCHOU Beecceneeeeunaae ges peat ees S qe lack LOCaHON xac 6 eed doper h BERSE HR es 368 Jack Operation 2x 62 44 0H eve ORR neraka 368 369 Jacking IASHUCHONS 2 6 344400 dst a be due 369 JUMP Sar AA EE EE 6 3 icri ge N 97 9 Key PrOSTADUUIIE sai RARR OE PREEK RATS I ker Repicemenl 32 2 2 524 9 329 949 992 DE 16 Key Sentry immobilizer sx someone HR dc e o 15 IS eu Bun e TD T5 Keyless Entry System Sedan 19 he wena e Gea eee oa e e 12 Knee Bolster SE aaa 54 56 Lane Change and Turn Signals 419 Lone Chan e AJSISE a3 cdd ikar trenaren 142 Lap Shoulder Belts 244 5 b6 465 4565 26 oe Ea 37 464 INDEX NEE Id Latches 4 5 eo eo eee AO SET ee eee RE 82 Food 444406 oes he ee ee a eae Bee 137 Lead Free Gasoline eee 344 Leaks Fluid 000000000 82 Lie Gr lites soas oon ook eo ere Be eee eae as 252 Igfteale 96dan aanse BEREA Eats ce Soa KORE de ed 34 Liftgate Window Wiper Washer 174 Like DUDS 244 oe sees neage et ee TERES a iS 82 415 Eris P 82 139 PES spari qoe desc Mk GE d bou 55 62 68 81 186 PUE See oe es So ces ae EE oe 190 Aai LOE 23 9 394 8 8 OR 187 back Ep Gin eee T 419 Brake Warning sa Ee otha 4 een ea
296. nter of the steering wheel and the right side of the instrument panel When the ORC detects a collision requiring the airbags it signals the inflator units A large quantity of non toxic gas is generated to inflate the Advanced Front Airbags Different airbag inflation rates are possible based on the collision type and sever ity The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the bags inflate to their full size The bags fully inflate in about 50 to 70 milliseconds This is about half of the time it takes to blink your eyes The bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger The driver front airbag gas is vented through the vent holes in the sides of the airbag The passenger front airbag gas is vented through the vent holes in the sides of the airbag In this way the airbags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle Supplemental Side Seat Airbag Inflator Units If Equipped The Side Impact SRS Seat Mounted Side Airbags are designed to activate only in certain side collisions 64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME The ORC determines if a side collision requires the side airbags to inflate based on the severity and type of collision The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON positions These include all of the items pr
297. o the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones 230 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display Tum the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid range tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade AM FM Button Press the buttons to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET RND button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 to 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET RND button the station will continue to play but will not be stored into
298. o Man Frontal Area 22 sq ft 2 04 sq m 22 sq ft 2 04 sq m 2 4L Auto with Free dom Drive II Off Road Package AWL Max GTW Gross Trailer Wt Max Tongue Wt See Note 1 1 000 Ibs 450 ke 150 Ibs 50 kg 1 000 Ibs 450 ke 150 Ibs 50 kg 32 sq ft 3 0 sq m 2 000 Ibs 907 kg 300 Ibs 136 kg Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds Note 1 The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo and should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard Refer to Tire Safety Information in this section Trailer and Tongue Weight Always load a trailer with 60 to 65 of the weight in the front of the trailer This places 10 to 15 of the Gross Trailer Weight GTW on the tow hitch of your vehicle Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway severely from side to side which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of many trailer accidents Never exceed the maximum trailer tongue weight stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch ee STARTING AND OPERATING 357 057003767 Consider the following items when computing the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle e The trailer tongue weight of the trailer e The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put in or on your vehicle e The weight of
299. o adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be se lected Many radio stations do not currently broadcast Music Type information 212 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following format types Program Type 16 Digit Character Display No program type or Adult Hits Classical Classic Rock College Countr D Pun add S ME OER EE EE reader Foreign Language Information Jazz News N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 213 station with the same selected Music Type name The Music Type function only operates when in the FM mode If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset station SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between the following items NOTE Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to scroll through the entries Push the AUDIO SELECT button to select an entry and make changes e DVD Enter When the disc is in DVD Menu mode selecting DVD Enter will allow you to play the current highlighted selection Use the re
300. o resolve the concern you may contact the manufacturer s customer center Any communication to the manufacturer s customer cen ter should include the following information e Owner s name and address e Owner s telephone number home and office e Authorized dealership name Vehicle Identification Number VIN Vehicle delivery date and mileage Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center P O Box 21 8004 Auburn Hills MI 48321 8004 Phone 800 992 1997 Chrysler Canada Inc Customer Center P O Box 1621 Windsor Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone 800 465 2001 In Mexico contact Av Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma 1240 Sante Fe C P 05109 Mexico D F In Mexico City 5081 7568 Outside Mexico City 1 800 505 1300 N F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 449 Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDD TTY To assist customers who have hearing difficulties the manufacturer has installed special TDD Telecommuni cation Devices for the Deaf equipment at its customer center Any hearing or speech impaired customer who has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter TTY in the United States can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1 800 380 CHRY Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by Bell Canada For TTY teletypewriter users dial 711 and for Voice callers dial 1 800 855 0511 to connect with a Bell Relay Service operator
301. ogen bulbs Take care not to touch 5 Pull bulb outward from assembly the bulb with your fingers Body oils from your fingers could cause excessive heat buildup which reduces bulb life Fog Lamps See your authorized dealer for replacement N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 419 Tail Lamps Rear Turn Signals and Backup Lamps 1 Remove the two push pins from the taillamp housing 2 Grasp the taillamp and pull firmly to disengage the light from the aperture panel 3 Twist and remove socket from the light 4 Remove bulb from socket and replace License Lamps 1 Use a screw driver to gently pry against the side of the snap tab to remove the lamp from the liftgate 420 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M 2 Rotate the socket 1 4 turn counterclockwise Center High Mounted Stoplamp 3 Pull the bulb from the socket Light is an LED assembly See your authorized dealer for replacement N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 421 FLUID CAPACITIES Fuel Approximate 13 6 Gallons 51 5 Liters Engine Oil with Filter 2 0L and 2 4L Engine SAE 5W 20 API Certified 4 26 Liters Cooling System oo T y 2 0L and 2 4L Engine MOPAR Engine Coolant Antifreeze 5 7 2 Quarts 6 8 Liters Year 100 000 Mile Formula or equivalent Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level 422 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE NN id FLUIDS LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS Engine Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Engine Coolant MOPAR Antifre
302. ollows e For vehicles eguipped with the EVIG refer to Flash Light With Lock under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following steps 1 Press and hold the UNLOCK button on a programmed RKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds but no longer than 10 seconds Then press and hold the LOCK button while still holding the UNLOCK button 2 Release both buttons at the same time 3 Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press ing the LOCK UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter with the ignition switch in the LOCK position and the key removed 4 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Vehicle Security Alarm Opening a door with the Vehicle Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm Using The Panic Alarm To turn the Panic Alarm feature ON or OFF press and hold the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one second and release When the Panic Alarm is on the headlights and park lights will flash the horn will pulse on and off and the interior lights will turn on NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23 The Panic Alarm will stay on f
303. om acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevail ing road conditions The BAS cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplan ing Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents e The capabilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others 310 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id Traction Control System TCS This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of the driven wheels If wheel spin is detected brake pressure is applied to the slipping wheel s and engine power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability A feature of the TCS system functions similar to a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel This will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning This feature remains active even if TCS and ESC are in either the Partial Off or Full Off modes Refer to Electronic Stability Control ESC in this section of this manual Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by monitoring the driver s steering wheel input and the speed of t
304. on ice snow wet mud loose sand etc Traction When driving on wet or slushy roads it is possible for a wedge of water to build up between the tire and road surface This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability To reduce this possibility the following precautions should be observed 1 Slow down during rainstorms or when roads are slushy 290 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id 2 Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles 3 Replace the tires when tread wear indicators first become visible 4 Keep the tires properly inflated 5 Maintain enough distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden stop DRIVING THROUGH WATER Driving through water more than a few inches centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and prevent damage to your vehicle Flowing Rising Water WARNING Do not drive on or across a road or path where water is flowing and or rising as in storm run off Flow ing water can wear away the road or path s surface and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water Furthermore flowing and or rising water can carry your vehicle away swiftly Failure to follow this warning may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you Shallow Standing Water Although your vehicle is capable of driving through shallow standing wat
305. on Stain Repel products 410 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Interior Care Use MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent to clean fabric upholstery and carpeting Use MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent to clean vinyl upholstery MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent is specifically recom mended for leather upholstery Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent Care should be taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid Please do not use polishes oils cleaning fluids solvents detergents or ammonia based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery Application of a leather condi tioner is not required to maintain the original condition WARNING Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes Many are potentially flammable and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm Cleaning Headlights Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output avoid wiping with a dry cloth To remove
306. on is moved out of PARK e The brake pedal is pressed To Exit Remote Start Mode without Driving the Vehicle Press and release the REMOTE START button one time or allow the engine to run for the entire 15 minute cycle NOTE To avoid unintentional shut downs the system will disable the one time press of the REMOTE START button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote Start request To Exit Remote Start Mode and Drive the Vehicle Before the end of the 15 minute cycle press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm if equipped Then insert the key into the ignition switch and turn the switch to the ON position NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON position in order to drive the vehicle N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27 DOOR LOCKS WARNING Manual Door Locks Use the manual door lock plunger to lock the doors from inside the vehicle If the plunger is down when the door is closed the door will lock Make sure the keys are not inside the vehicle before closing the door e For personal security and safety in the event of an accident lock the vehicle doors as you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle When leaving the vehicle always remove the key from the ignition lock and lock your vehicle Do not leave unattended children in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Unsupervised use of vehicle eq
307. onger exists A system fault can occur with any of the following scenarios 1 Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPM sensors 2 Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals 3 Snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPM sensors NOTE Your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare wheel and tire assembly 1 The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor Therefore the TPMS will not monitor the tire pressure in the compact spare tire 2 If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition key cycle a chime will sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will still turn ON due to the low tire 3 However after driving the vehicle for up to 20 min utes above 15 mph 25 km h the Tire Pressure Moni toring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid 4 For each subsequent ignition key cycle a chime will sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid 340 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id 5 Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare tire
308. ons for an alternate way to select or delete a paired phone N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111 Select Another Cellular Phone This feature allows you to select and start using another phone paired with the uconnect phone e Press the button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Select Phone and follow the prompts e You can also press the 4 button at any time while the list is being played and then choose the phone that you wish to select e The selected phone will be used for the next phone call If the selected phone is not available the uconnect phone will return to using the highest priority phone present in or near approximately within 30 ft 9 m the vehicle Delete uconnect phone Paired Cellular Phones e Press the amp button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing e At the next prompt say Delete and follow the prompts e You can also press the amp button at any time while the list is being played and then choose the phone you wish to delete Things You Should Know About Your uconnect phone uconnect phone Tutorial To hear a brief tutorial of the system features press the X button and say uconnect Tutorial 112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Voice Training For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog nizing their voice commands or numbers t
309. or three minutes unless you turn it off by pressing the PANIC button a second time or if the vehicle speed is 5 mph 8 km h or greater NOTE When you turn off the Panic Alarm by pressing the PANIC button a second time you may have to be closer to the vehicle due to the radio frequency noises of the system Programming Additional Transmitters Refer to Sentry Key Customer Key Programming If you do not have a programmed RKE transmitter contact your authorized dealer for details General Information This device complies with Part 15 of FCC rules and with RS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation NOTE Changes or modifications not expressly ap proved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal distance check for these two conditions 1 Weak battery in the RKE transmitter The expected life of battery is five years 2 Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station tower airport transmitter military base and some mobile or CB radios Transmitter Battery Replacement NOTE Perchlorate Material special handling may ap ply See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate 24 THING
310. orms best for front seat occupants only 2 Dial in the temperature you would like the system to maintain by rotating the Temperature Control knob Once the comfort level is selected the sys tem will maintain that level automati cally using the heating system Should the desired comfort level require air conditioning the system will automatically make the adjustment 045607537 You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to function automatically Selecting the O OFF position on the blower control stops the system completely and closes the outside air intake 266 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id The recommended setting for maximum comfort for the average person is 72 F 22 C however this may vary NOTE e The temperature setting can be adjusted at anytime without affecting automatic operation e Pressing the Air Conditioning Control button while in AUTO mode will cause the LED in the control button to flash three times and then turn off This indicates that the system is in AUTO mode and requesting the air conditioning is not necessary e If your air conditioning performance seems lower than expected check the front of the A C condenser located in front of the radiator for an accumulation of dirt or insects Clean with a gentle water spray from behind the radiator and through the condenser Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser reducing
311. osed bon Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious Pisos dosed injury or death when inhaled Keep Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitters Hazard switch off away from children Operation of the Remote Start System windows door locks or other controls Brake switch inactive brake pedal not pressed t could cause serious injury or death Ignition key removed from ignition switch To Enter Remote Start Press and release the REMOTE START button RKE PANIC button not pressed x2 on the RKE transmitter twice within five sec onds The parking lights will flash and the horn will chirp twice if programmed Then the engine will start and the vehicle will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15 minute cycle Battery at an acceptable charge level 26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id NOTE e The park lamps will turn on and remain on during Remote Start mode e For security power window and power sunroof op eration if eguipped are disabled when the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode e The engine can be started two consecutive times two 15 minute cycles with the RKE transmitter However the ignition switch must be cycled to the ON position before you can repeat the start seguence for a third cycle Remote start will also cancel if any of the following occur e The engine stalls or RPM exceeds 2500 e Any engine warning lamps come on e The hood is opened The hazard switch is pressed The transmissi
312. ous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK EJECT Button Ejecting a CD button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in Press the EJECT button to eject the CD CD and MP3 modes TIME Button Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display 244 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id RW FF Press and hold FF Fast Forward and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner AM FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button Random Play Button Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran domly selected track Press the SET RND button a second time to stop Ran dom Play Notes On Playing MP3 Files The radio can play MP3 files however acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 files pay attention to the following restric tions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 and CDDA MP3 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are I
313. panies which time out a little too soon to work properly with the uconnect phone Voice Mail Calling To learn how to access your voice mail refer to Working with Automated Systems Working with Automated Systems This method is used in instances where one generally has to press numbers on the cellular phone keypad while navigating through an automated telephone system You can use your uconnect phone to access a voice mail system or an automated service such as a paging service or automated customer service line Some services re quire immediate response selection In some instances that may be too quick for use of the uconnect phone When calling a number with your uconnect phone that normally requires you to enter in a touch tone sequence on your cellular phone keypad you can press the button and say the sequence you wish to enter followed by the word Send For example if required to enter your PIN followed with a pound 3 7 4 6 you can press the button and say 3 7 4 6 Send Saying a number or sequence of numbers followed by Send is 108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M also to be used for navigating through an automated customer service center menu structure and to leave a number on a pager You can also send stored uconnect phonebook entries as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager entries To use this feature dial the number you wish to call an
314. people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and running adjust your heating or cooling controls to force using a seat belt properly outside air into the vehicle Set the blower at high speed N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81 If you are required to drive with the trunk liftgate open make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high speed DO NOT use the recirculation mode The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have a competent mechanic inspect the com plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken damaged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change Replace as required Safety Checks You Should Make Inside the Vehicle Seat Belts Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays and loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not dis
315. perate for two wipe cycles then turn off 146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN ed WARNING Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could lead to an accident You might not see other vehicles or other obstacles To avoid sudden icing of the windshield during freezing weather warm the windshield with the defroster before and during windshield washer use Mist Feature Push down on the control lever to activate a single wipe to clear the windshield of road mist or spray from a passing vehicle As long as the lever is held down the Mist Control wipers will continue to operate 031507504 NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147 CAUTION Push down on the lever to unlock the steering column With one hand firmly on the steering wheel move the In cold weather always turn off the wiper switch and steering column up or down as desired Push the lever allow the wipers to return to the park position before turning off the engine If the wiper switch is left on and the wipers freeze to the windshield damage to the wiper motor may occur when the vehicle is restarted TILT STEERING COLUMN This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward The tilt control handle is located on the left side of the steering column below the turn signal lever Tilting Steering Column Control 148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Do not adjust the ste
316. pressor lubricants at the start of each warm season This service should approved by the manufacturer for your air condi include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance tioning system Some unapproved refrigerants are test Drive belt tension should also be checked at this flammable and can explode injuring you Other time unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail requiring costly repairs Refer to CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning Section 3 of the Warranty Information book lo cated on the DVD for further warranty informa tion e The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to the system adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced repairman system as the chemicals can damage your air condi tioning components Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 393 Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R 134a air conditioning refrigerant is a hydrofluoro carbon HFC that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone saving product How ever the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by authorized dealers or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment NOTE Use only manufacturer approved A C system sealers stop leak products
317. ption service provider is Sirius Satellite Radio This service offers over 130 channels of music sports news entertainment and programming for chil dren directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios NOTE Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has limited coverage in Alaska System Activation Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre activated and you may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio service that is included with the factory installed satellite radio system in your vehicle Sirius will supply a welcome kit that contains general information including how to setup your on line listening account For further information call the toll free number 888 539 7474 or visit the Sirius web site at WWW sirius com or at www siriuscanada ca for Canadian residents 254 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID Please have the following information available when calling 1 The Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID 2 Your Vehicle Identification Number To access the ESN SID refer to the following steps ESN SID Access With REO RES Radios With the ignition switch in the ON RUN or ACC posi tion and the radio on press the SETUP button and scroll using the TUNE SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is selected Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob and the Sirius ID number will display The Sirius ID number d
318. pushbutton memory You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 231 and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM and 12 FM stations DISC Button Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to Disc modes Operation Instructions CD MODE For CD And MP3 Audio Play NOTE e The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio e This radio is capable of playing compact discs CD recordable compact discs CD R rewritable compact discs CD RW compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks Inserting Compact Disc s Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display If a CD does not go into the slot more than 1 0 in 2 5 cm a disc may already be loaded and must be ejected before a ne
319. r A two point pivot system allows for horizontal and vertical mirror adjustment Adjust the mirror to center on the view through the rear window Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small control under the mirror to the night position toward the rear of vehicle The mirror should be adjusted while set in the day position toward the windshield A Adjusting Rearview Mirror 030407085 88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning never Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from vehicles behind you You can turn the feature on or off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror A light next to the button will illuminate to indicate when the dimming feature is activated 030406002 Automatic Dimming Mirror spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean Power Mirrors The power mirror controls are located on the driver s door trim panel 030406198 Power Mirror Control UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89 To adjust a mirror turn the control wand toward the left or right mirror positions indicated Tilt the control wand in the direction you want the mirror to move When you are finished adjusting the mirror turn the control to the center position to prevent accidentally moving a mirror
320. r Divine INOUS acea dace ga ened RADE 290 Wheel and Wheel TUB scd ca v 939 eq DER 409 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care ss 409 Wind DUGUINE mae aene BRA REDS RR et ne 160 Window POseine 240444 equ ah eS RR S Eta 27 lunc MEE IE NEE ET nee nea IG 32 VOWEL 42244 RR GR DE ARE EO REG KEINE RE MS 32 Windshield Defroster 82 263 268 Windshield Washers 144 145 Windshield Wipers 25 0056 pe sons one utes 144 393 Wipers biterinitieit siese 9 oo RE HR ER 145
321. r approximately 10 minutes For an addi tional five minutes of operation press the button a second time NOTE To prevent excessive battery drain use the rear window defroster only when the engine is operating 176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id CAUTION Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements e Use care when washing the inside of the rear window Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution wiping parallel to the heating elements Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water Do not use scrapers sharp instruments or abra sive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window e Keep all objects a safe distance from the window ROOF LUGGAGE RACK IF EQUIPPED The crossbars and siderails are designed to carry the weight on vehicles equipped with a luggage rack The load must not exceed 150 lbs 68 kg and should be uniformly distributed over the luggage rack crossbars NOTE If not equipped with crossbars your authorized dealer can order and install MOPAR crossbars built specifically for this roof rack system Distribute cargo weight evenly on the roof rack crossbars The roof rack does not increase the total load carrying capacity of the vehicle Be sure the total load of cargo inside the vehicle plus that on the external rack does not exceed the maximum vehicle lo
322. r right foot is firmly on the brake pedal Brake Transmission Interlock System This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System BTSI that holds the shift lever in the PARK position when the ignition switch is in the LOCK position To move the shift lever out of the PARK position the ignition switch must be turned to the ON or START position engine running or not and the brake pedal must be pressed NOTE If a malfunction occurs the transaxle will not shift out of PARK Battery power is required to release the brake transmission interlock system There is a remov able plug in the right side of the shift lever housing that allows you to insert your finger to override the system The key must be in the ignition and in the ON position to use the override lever If this occurs obtain service as soon as possible Automatic Transaxle Ignition Interlock System This system prevents the key from being removed unless the shift lever is in PARK It also prevents shifting out of PARK unless the key is in the ON position and the brake pedal is pressed NOTE If a malfunction occurs the system will trap the key in the ignition cylinder to warn you that this safety feature is inoperable The engine can be started and stopped but the key cannot be removed until you obtain service NS TA TING AND OPERATING 285 Gear Ranges DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL positions into another gear rang
323. r system function and operating information To make your selection press and release the EVIC button until On or Off appears Display Units In The EVIC odometer and uconnect gps system units can be changed between English and Metric Press and hold the EVIC button when in this display until ENGLISH or METRIC appears to make your selection Confirmation of Voice Commands If Equipped ru When ON is selected all voice commands from the uconnect system are confirmed Press and hold the EVIC button when in this display until ON or OFF appears to make your selection Automatic Compass Calibration When the vehicle is new the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will display CAL until the compass is calibrated You may also calibrate the compass by com pleting one or more 360 degree turns in an area free from 206 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL large metal or metallic objects until the CAL message displayed in the EVIC turns off The compass will now function normally NOTE A good calibration requires a level surface and an environment free from large metallic objects such as buildings bridges underground cables railroad tracks etc Compass Variance Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic North and Geographic North To ensure compass accu racy the compass variance should be properly set accord ing to the variance map for the zone where the vehicle will be driven W
324. r the front and rear axles must not be exceeded For further information on GAWRs vehicle loading and trailer towing refer to Vehicle Loading in this section To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg on the Tire and Loading Information placard The combined weight of occupants cargo luggage and trailer tongue weight if applicable should never exceed the weight referenced here Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occu pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg on your vehicle s placard 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg 324 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id 4 The resulting figure eguals the available amount of NOTE cargo and luggage load capacity For example if XXX amount equals 1 400 lbs 635 kg and there will be five 150 Ib 68 kg passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs 295 kg since 5 x 150 750 and 1400 750 650 lbs 295 kg 5 Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4
325. r when you need it to prevent an accident If you have been operating your vehicle in dirty conditions get your brakes checked and cleaned as necessary Failure to do so may result is serious injury POWER STEERING The standard power steering system will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces The system will provide mechanical steering capability if power assist is lost If for some reason the power assist is interrupted it will still be possible to steer your vehicle Under these condi tions you will observe a substantial increase in steering effort especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers NOTE e Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel travel are considered normal and do not indicate that there is a problem with the power steering system e Upon initial start up in cold weather the power steer ing pump may make noise for a short amount of time This is due to the cold thick fluid in the steering system This noise should be considered normal and it does not in any way damage the steering system 302 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id WARNING apparent and or the system is not functioning as antici pated Coordinate inspection efforts through an autho Continued operation with reduced power steering rized dealer assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others CAUTION Service should be obtained as soon as possible
326. ransmission will return to the automatic mode until the problem is corrected FOUR WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION IF Four Wheel Drive Switch EQUIPPED Where one or more wheels have wheel spin or if addi This feature provides full time on demand four wheel tional traction is needed in sand deep snow or loose drive 4WD traction surfaces activate the 4WD LOCK switch by pulling up once and releasing This locks the center coupling allowing more torque to be sent to the rear wheels The 4WD Indicator Light will come on in the NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 289 WARNING Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the cluster This can be done on the fly at any vehicle speed To deactivate simply pull on the switch one more time The 4WD Indicator Light will then go out NOTE Refer to Electronic Stability Control ESC in the Electronic Brake Control System section of this manual for additional information DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES Acceleration Rapid acceleration on snow covered wet or other slip pery surfaces may cause the front wheels to pull errati cally to the right or left This phenomenon occurs when there is a difference in the surface traction under the front driving wheels front wheels You could lose control of the vehicle and possibly have an accident Accelerate slowly and carefully whenever there is likely to be poor tracti
327. rated by rotating a switch located on the end of the lever For information on the rear wiper washer refer to Rear Window Fea tures in this section 036407502 Wiper Washer Control Lever Windshield Wiper Operation Rotate the end of the lever upward to the LO position for low speed wiper operation Rotate the end of the lever upward to the HI position for high speed wiper operation 031507503 Wiper Control Intermittent Wiper System Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause be tween cycles desirable Select the delay interval by turning the end of the lever Rotate the end of the lever upward clockwise to decrease the delay time and UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145 downward counterclockwise to increase the delay time The delay can be regulated from a maximum of approxi mately 18 seconds between cycles to a cycle every second NOTE The wiper delay times depend on vehicle speed If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph 16 km h delay times will be doubled Windshield Washers To use the washer pull the control lever toward you and hold while spray is desired If the lever is pulled while in the delay range the wiper will operate in low speed for two wipe cycles after the lever is released and then resume the intermittent interval previously selected If the lever is pulled while in the off position the wipers will o
328. ration any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof Sunshade Operation The sunshade can be opened manually However the sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens NOTE The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is open Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window sunroof Maintenance Use only a non abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the glass panel N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161 Ignition Off Operation The sunroof will also operate up to 45 seconds after the ignition has been turned OFF The sunroof operation will be canceled if either of the front doors are opened during the 45 second time period ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS There is a standard 12 Volt 13 Amp power outlet located in the instrument panel for added convenience This power outlet can power cellular phones electronics and other low power devices 034606144 12 Volt Power Outlet Power is available when the
329. rheating and failure front wheels Then shift back and forth between RE It can also damage the tires Do not spin the wheels above 30 mph 48 km h VERSE and 1st gear Using minimal accelerator pedal pressure to maintain the rocking motion without spin ning the wheels is most effective WARNING NOTE If your vehicle is equipped with Traction Con Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener trol or Electronic Stability Control ESC turn the system ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage or OFF before attempting to rock the vehicle even failure of the axle and tires A tire could explode and injure someone Do not spin your vehi cle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop ping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed e When rocking a stuck vehicle by moving be tween 1st and REVERSE do not spin the wheels faster than 15 mph 24 km h or drivetrain damage may result Continued N WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 377 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE Manual Transaxle With Ignition Key e Front Wheel Drive FWD or All Wheel Drive AWD Automatic Transaxle vehicles can be flat towed all four wheels on the ground with the transmission in NEUTRAL e Front Wheel Drive FWD vehicles can be towed with the front wheels elevated or on a flatbed truck all four wheels off the ground e All Wheel Drive
330. ride the system The ignition key must be in the ON position to use the override lever MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS N Engine Compartment 2 0L 381 W Maintenance Procedures 386 N Engine Compartment 2 4L 382 EES MeO PC 387 ll Onboard Diagnostic System OBD H 383 siese Ik oi esso wis EE EN 390 H Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message 383 O Engine Air Cleaner Filter a ea cox CR Red 390 Mi Emissions Inspection And Maintenance E Maintenance Free Battery swerm sk EER GE tDI di wag eed sare yk eR ee Gare Pu 384 EU Oe ARE Maintenance B Replacement Parts ES ES Se 385 liodie DubHesHon AE EE 393 W Dealer Service us va aerae EE EO EE 385 4 Windshield Wiper Blades rererere 393 o Adding Washer Fluid seus 394 380 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ME O Exhaust System 394 EE Go SVS wa sete se RR ss RE OP ea AR A Drake system x sos scr each ye one eon Rosas 402 O Automatic Transaxle CVT If Equipped 404 o Manual Transaxle If Equipped 405 o Rear Drive Assembly RDA AWD 4WD Models Only oie 44634 9755 LE PS eu eee 406 D Power Transfer Unit PTU AWD AWD Models Only se 3424544064 645452 42 SCR 406 O Appearance Care And Protection From COMOSION 25244582644 WEER BURE He Nia 407 Mises TEE FOR EE 412 O Integrated Power Module IPM 412 IN Vehicle Storage sas4e044 HPP ORE MEDE HERE 415 Mi Replacement Bulbs
331. rks best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 263 Defrost CH Air is directed through the windshield and side window demist outlets Use this mode with maxi mum blower and temperature settings for best wind shield and side window defrosting NOTE The air conditioning compressor operates in Mix Defrost or a blend of these modes even if the Air Conditioning A C button is not pressed This dehu midifies the air to help dry the windshield To improve fuel economy use these modes only when necessary Recirculation Control Pressing the Recirculation Control button will c put the system in recirculation mode This can be used when outside conditions such as smoke odors dust or high humidity are present Activating recirculation will cause the LED in the control button to illuminate 264 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NOTE Continuous use of the recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur Extended use of this mode is not recommended The use of the recirculation mode in cold or damp weather will cause windows to fog on the inside because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle Select the Outside Air position for maximum defogging The A C will engage automatically to prevent fogging when the recirculation button is pre
332. ro planing Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents Continued WARNING Continued e The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others fes The ABS Warning Light monitors the ABS System The light will come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may stay on for as long as four seconds If the ABS Warning Light remains on or comes on while driving it indicates that the anti lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required However the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the Brake Warning Light is not on If the ABS Warning Light is on the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the STARTING AND OPERATING 307 benefits of anti lock brakes If the ABS Warning Light does not come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position have the bulb repaired as soon as possible If both the Brake Warning Light and the ABS Warning Light remain on the ABS and Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD systems are not functioning Immedi ate repair to the ABS is required When the vehicle is driven over 7 mph 11 km h you may also hear a slight clicking sound as well as some related motor noises These noises are the system per forming
333. s 160 000 km or 96 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 90 000 Miles 150 000 km or 90 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the spark plugs Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary Y Adjust the parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer a d Hd Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Change the manual transaxle fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following trailer towing snow plowing heavy loading taxi police delivery service commercial service off road desert operation or more than 50 of your driving is at sustained speeds during hot weather above 90 F 32 C Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 4
334. s 9 kg Convertible child seats can be used either rearward facing or forward facing in the vehicle Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearward facing direction than infant carriers do so they can be used rearward facing by children who weigh more than 20 lbs 9 kg but are younger than one year old Rearward facing child seats must NEVER be used in the front seat of a vehicle with a front passenger airbag An airbag deployment could cause severe injury or death to infants in this position 72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id Older Children and Child Restraints NOTE For additional information refer to www seatcheck org or call 1 866 SEATCHECK Cana dian residents should refer to Transport Canada s web site for additional information http www tc gc ca roadsafety safedrivers childsafety index htm e Children who weigh more than 20 lbs 9 kg and who are older than one year can ride forward facing in the vehicle Forward facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward facing direction are for children who weigh 20 to 40 lbs 9 to 18 kg and who are older than one year These child seats are also held VARS NIUN KG in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH e Improper installation can lead to failure of an child restraint anchorage system Refer to LATCH infant or child restraint It could come loose in a Child Seat Anchorage System Lower Anchors a
335. s intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited DTS DTS and DTS 2 0 are trademarks of Digital The ater Systems Inc SALES CODE RER REN RBZ AM FM CD DVD RADIO IF EQUIPPED NOTE The sales code is located on the lower right side of the unit s faceplate The REN RER and RBZ radios contain a CD DVD player USB port and a 30 gigabyte hard drive HDD Sirius Satellite Radio is optional The 6 5 in 16 5 cm touch screen allows for easy menu selection The RER radio also contains a Global Positioning System GPS based Navigation system Refer to your uconnect tunes REN RER or RBZ user s manual for detailed operating instructions Operating Instructions Voice Recognition System VR If Equipped For the radio refer to Voice Recognition System VR in Section 3 224 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id Operating Instructions uconnect phone If Equipped Refer to uconnect phone in Section 3 Clock Setting Procedure RBZ Radio To Manually Set the Clock 1 Turn on the radio 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed the clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 To move the hour forward touch the screen where the word Hour with the arrow pointing upward is dis played To move the hour backward touch the screen where the word Hour with
336. s Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the spark plugs Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Adjust the parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Replace the air conditioning filter Replace rear drive assembly RDA fluid Replace power transfer unit PTU fluid Change the automatic transaxle fluid and filter if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet or frequent trailer towing Flush and replace the engine coolant at 60 months if not done at 102 000 miles 170 000 km Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary O C O O O O C C O L LLE Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 435 66 000 Miles 110 000 km or 66 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate tires Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 72 000 Miles 120 000 km or 72 Months Maintenance Service Schedule J Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate tires L1 If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace
337. s a problem in the circuit that must be corrected VEHICLE STORAGE If you will not be using your vehicle for more than 21 days you may want to take steps to preserve your battery e Disengage the mini fuse in the Power Distribution Center labeled IOD Ignition Off Draw e Disconnect the negative cable from the battery REPLACEMENT BULBS All the inside bulbs are brass or glass wedge base Aluminum base bulbs are not approved and should not be used for replacement LIGHT BULBS Interior Bulb Number Front Header Lamp ua o noe a tb RE HE bs T578 Center Dome Lamp ias ii pde N rr Re de ex T578 Rear Cargo Lamp Flashlight 8 A3SLF 416 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M pana LIGHTS BULBS Exterior Bulb No Low Beam High Beam Headlamp Hi Front Park Turn Signal Side Marker Lamp 3757KA Pront Fog LaPresse eie aang e ded ER PSX24W Center High Mounted Stop Lamp CHMSL o 4 2e eenure oe EE see LED Assembly Rear Tail Tir stop Lamp cem gutes mes 3157 Backup Lamps s ure Rae REEDE ues i W16W 921 License LADD Pm W5W BULB REPLACEMENT Headlamps 1 Raise the hood and locate the connector behind the headlamp N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 417 2 Reach into engine compartment and pull red lock out 3 Remove the green connector from the back of the bulb at connector by pulling straight back 418 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Mmmm 4 Twist the bulb to the left NOTE These are hal
338. s for the front heated seats are located on the center instrument panel area After turning the ignition ON you can choose from High Low or Off heat settings Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in use Two indicator lights will illuminate for High one for Low and none for Off a If High level heating is selected the system automatically switches to Low level heating and turns one indicator light Off after 30 minutes of continuous operation It will Press the switch once to select High level heat ing Press the switch a second time to select Low level heating Press the switch a third time to shut the heating elements Off turn the heater and the remaining indicator light off after an additional 30 minutes of continuous operation If Low level heating is selected the system automatically turns the heater and the indicator light Off after 30 min utes of continuous operation NOTE Once a heat setting is selected heat will be felt within two to five minutes WARNING e Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medication alcohol use ex haustion or other physical condition must exercise care when using the seat heater It may cause burns even at low temperatures especially if used for long periods of time Continued NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131 A Fold Flat Front Passenger Seat
339. s in the DTE calcula tion and the current fuel tank level Tire Pressure Monitor TPM Refer to Section 5 Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS for system operation NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 203 Elapsed Time Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset when the ignition switch is in the ACC position Elapsed time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON or START position Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features This allows the driver to set and recall features when the transmission is in PARK automatic transmission or the vehicle is stopped manual transmission Press and release the EVIC button until Personal Set tings is displayed in the EVIC Use the EVIC button to display one of the following choices Language When in this display you may select different languages for all display nomenclature including the trip functions Pressing the EVIC button while in this display selects English Espanol Deutsch Italiano Francais or NL de pending on availability As you continue the displayed information will be shown in the selected language NOTE uconnect language will not change using the EVIC Please refer to Language Selection in the uconnect phone If Equipped section of this manual for details Auto Lock Doors at 15 mph 24 km h When ON is selected all doors lock automatically when the speed of the vehicle reaches 15 mph 24 km
340. s of surface conditions hard packed dirt gravel rocks grass sand mud snow and ice Every surface has a different effect on your vehicle s steering handling and traction Control ling your vehicle is one of the keys to successful off road driving so always keep a firm grip on the steering wheel and maintain a good driving posture Avoid sudden accelerations turns or braking In most cases there are no road signs posted speed limits or signal lights Therefore you will need to use your own good judgment on what is safe and what is not When on a trail you should always be looking ahead for surface obstacles and changes in terrain The key is to plan your future driving route while remembering what you are currently driving over CAUTION Never park your vehicle over dry grass or other combustible materials The heat from your vehicle exhaust system could cause a fire WARNING Always wear your seat belt and firmly tie down cargo Unsecured cargo can become projectiles in an off road situation When To Use Low L Off Road with the 4WD Lock Lever Engaged When driving off road shift into low L Off Road and activate the 4WD LOCK This will provide additional traction and activates the numerous off road features to improve handling and control on slippery or difficult terrain Due to the sustained lower gearing low L 294 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id Off Road with 4WD LOCK engaged will allow the engine to operate
341. se snow tires only in sets of four failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph 120 km h TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at different loads and perform different steering driving and braking functions For these reasons they wear at unequal rates and tend to develop irregular wear pat terns These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with ageressive tread designs such as those on all season type tires Rotation will increase tread life help to maintain mud snow and wet traction levels and contribute to a smooth quiet ride Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for the proper maintenance intervals More frequent rotation is permissible if desired The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being performed STARTING AND OPERATING 335 The suggested rotation method is shown in the following TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM TPMS diagram ED C ES gt 055707139 Tire Rotation The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom mended cold placard pressure The tire pressure will var
342. sed on your selection SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the following items e Display Sirius ID number Press the AUDIO SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number This number is used to activate deactivate or change the Sirius subscription SET Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a channel that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this channel and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but ton the channel will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 This allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into pushbutton memory The channels stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display 258 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 Satellite stations Operating Instructions uconnect phone If Equipped Refer to uconnect phone
343. smit tire pressure readings to the Receiver Module NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle regularly and to maintain the proper pressure The TPMS consists of the following components e Receiver Module e Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors e Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will illumi nate in the instrument cluster and an audible chime will be activated when one or more of the four active road tire pressures are low Should this occur you should stop as soon as possible check the inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle and inflate each tire to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value The system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitor ing Light will extinguish once the updated tire pressures have been received The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h to receive this information Check TPMS Warnings The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and remain on solid when a system NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 339 fault is detected The system fault will also sound a chime If the ignition key is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off when the fault condition no l
344. so may result in tipping and rolling the vehicle which may result in severe injury Always back carefully straight down a hill in REVERSE gear Never back down a hill in NEUTRAL using only the vehicle brakes Never drive diagonally across a hill always drive straight up or down Driving Through Water Extreme care should be taken crossing any type of water Water crossings should be avoided if possible and only be attempted when necessary in a safe responsible man ner You should only drive through areas which are designated and approved You should tread lightly and avoid damage to the environment You should know your vehicles abilities and be able to recover it if some thing goes wrong You should never stop or shut a vehicle off when crossing deep water unless you ingested water into the engine air intake If the engine stalls do not attempt to restart it Determine if it has ingested water first The key to any crossing is low and slow You want to use low L Off Road with the 4WD LOCK engaged and proceed very slowly with a constant slow speed 3 5 mph 5 8 km h maximum and light throttle Keep the vehicle moving do not try to accelerate through the crossing After crossing any water higher than the NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 299 bottom of the axde differentials you should inspect all of the vehicle fluids for signs of water ingestion CAUTION Water ingestion into the transaxle transfer case engine or vehicle int
345. ss the center button then lower the lever completely STARTING AND OPERATING 303 Parking Brake When the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON position the Brake Warning Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate 304 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id NOTE WARNING e When the parking brake is applied and the automatic transaxle is placed in gear the Brake Warning Light e Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving will flash If vehicle speed is detected a chime will unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a sound to alert the driver Fully release the parking number of reasons A child or others could be brake before attempting to move the vehicle seriously or fatally injured Do not leave the key in the ignition switch A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle When parking on a hill it is important to turn the front Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away before driving failure to do so can lead to brake from the curb on an uphill grade For vehicles equipped failure and an accident with an automatic transaxle apply the parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK otherwise the load on the transaxle locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK The parking brake should always be applied whenever the driver is not in the vehicle e This light o
346. ssed and the mode control is set to panel or panel floor The A C can be deselected manually without disturb ing the mode control selection When the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position the recirculation feature will be cancelled Air Conditioning Control Press this button to engage the Air Conditioning A light will illuminate when the Air Conditioning System is engaged Rotating the dial left into the T blue area of the scale indicates cooler 04560755 temperatures while rotating right into the red area indicates warmer tem peratures NOTE The air conditioning compressor will not engage until the engine has been running for about 10 seconds e MAX A C For maximum cooling use the A C and recirculation buttons at the same time e ECONOMY MODE If economy mode is desired press the A C button to turn OFF the indicator light and the A C compressor Then move the temperature control to the desired temperature Automatic Temperature Control ATC If Equipped 045607534 Automatic Temperature Control Automatic Operation The Automatic Temperature Control system automati cally maintains the climate in the cabin of the vehicle at the comfort levels desired by the driver and passenger UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 265 Operation of the system is quite simple 1 Turn the Mode Control knob on the right and the Blower Control knob on the left to AUTO NOTE The AUTO position perf
347. ssened or eliminated by relocating the cellular phone antenna This condition is not harmful to the radio If your radio performance does not satisfactorily clear by the repositioning of the antenna it is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off during cellular phone operation CLIMATE CONTROLS The Air Conditioning and Heating System is designed to make you comfortable in all types of weather NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 261 Manual Heating and Air Conditioning Blower Control Rotate this control to regulate the amount of air forced through the ven tilation system in any mode The blower speed increases as you move the control to the right from the O 045607577 OFF position There are four blower speeds NOTE For vehicles equipped with Remote Start the climate controls will not function during Remote Start operation if the blower control is left in the O Off 045607574 position The Manual Temperature Controls consist of a series of outer rotary dials and inner push knobs 262 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Temperature Control Rotate this control to regulate the tem perature of the air inside the passenger compartment Rotating the dial left into the blue area of the scale indicates cooler temperatures while rotating right into the red area indicates warmer tem peratures 045607540 NOTE If your air conditioning performance seems lower than expected check the
348. t phone allows you to transfer calls between the system and your cellular phone as you enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to mute the system s microphone for private conversation The uconnect phone is driven through your Bluetooth Hands Free Profile cellular phone uconnect features Bluetooth technology the global standard that enables different electronic devices to connect to each other without wires or a docking station so uconnect phone works no matter where you stow your cellular phone be it your purse pocket or briefcase as long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to the vehicle s uconnect phone The uconnect phone allows up to seven cellular phones to be linked to the system Only one linked or paired cellular phone can be used with the system at a time The system is available in English Spanish or French languages WARNING Any voice commanded system should be used only in safe driving conditions following local laws and phone use All attention should be kept on the roadway ahead Failure to do so may result in an accident causing serious injury or death Phone Button Depending on the vehicle options either the qo radio or the mirror will contain the two control buttons X phone button and amp voice recognition button that will enable you to access the system 94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id Voice Recognition Button e Actual button
349. t 4 s4a 406da s e ss 306 308 Master Cy le sis 64550544024 E Tem ERES 402 POURING 45 agus hous oe OG oe ee et 303 Hanung Fiche veces css KORREK ARK HS ee NES 188 Bikes ide eae baw heen eee eee oust ss 305 402 Brake Transmission Interlock 284 Break In Recommendations New Vehicle 79 Bulb Replacement PP de nes soe 415 416 bulbs Dio b 225 OES RT Acti ur d OIE 82 415 Capacities Antifreeze Engine Coolant 421 Capacite Fd Los open 34 6552eeeh ne AR ERR E 421 Caps Filler POC fare MEE TEEN EDE MET a ae 348 BIN ei M asa sea 6 m 382 389 Power DICENDO 242 14 53 9 teas d e E RR OER 302 SCA Ln MRT TEE EE oe 407 Carbon Monoxide Warning 80 348 Caro Area COVE m 170 Carto Area Hestures 2g usce s d i axe he RR 169 Cargo Compartment ERROR ON EE OE OER IT oe Luggage Carrier 458 INDEX NEE Id Coco E noe OER eee te aes PR N 169 Coreo Load PIOOE 4440265044554 30 bo EERS 172 Caroo He DONIS sie ars 9 23 5 FEE REUS a prec 172 Cellular Phone een 92 260 Center High Mounted Stop Light 420 Chans TNC AA ek OR oo ee eee EE 333 Chansmnne A Flat Ie a osea e hea VRA HS AE 368 Chare Tie IE si vis Ge Dad de eee ED HEN 319 Check Engine Light Malfunction Indicator Light 384 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety 80 CHECKS odlely A 80 CII Rose e4 g24 4 k oe He RR S N EE Ee 70 Child Restraint Tether Anchors 18 Child
350. t Reminder Light to turn off 3 Unbuckle and then re buckle the driver s seat belt at least three times within 10 seconds ending with the seat belt buckled NOTE Watch for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to turn on while unbuckling and off while re buckling the seat belt It may be necessary to retract the seat belt 4 Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position A single chime will sound to signify that you have success fully completed the programming BeltAlert can be reactivated by repeating this procedure 2 NOTE Although BeltAlert has been deactivated the Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate while the driver s seat belt remains unbuckled Seat Belt Extender If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended and when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage if equipped is in its lowest position your authorized dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender This extender should be used only if the existing belt is not long enough When it is not required remove the ex tender and store it 54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME WARNING Using a seat belt extender when not needed can increase the risk of injury in a collision Only use when the seat belt is not long enough when it is worn low and snug and in the recommended seating positions Remove and store the extender when not needed Seat Belts And Pregnant Women We recommend that pregnant women use the seat bel
351. t button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET RND button the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM 242 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM and 12 FM stations DISC AUX Button Pressing the DISC AUX button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to DISC AUX mode Operation Instructions CD MODE for CD and MP3 Audio Play NOTE e The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio e This radio is capable of playing compact discs CD recordable compact discs CD R rewritable compact discs CD RW compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks Inserting Compact Disc s Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD player and the
352. t of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the Tire Pressure Moni toring Sensor The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte nance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure using an accurate tire gauge even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light 338 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE id e Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the tire Base System V This is the TPMS warning indicator located in the instrument cluster The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure lev els Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem tran
353. t up to the next higher manual ratio unless you are already operating in or near Overdrive in which case sixth gear ratio will be selected In like manner moving the shift lever to will activate AutoStick and shift to the next lower manual ratio After AutoStick is activated the manual ratio selected is displayed in the transmission ratio display and tipping the shift lever to the or direction will cause an upshift or downshift by one ratio e By holding the shift lever to momentarily e When the shift lever is shifted out of DRIVE e When in sixth position touching the shift lever to the right e When heavy Anti Lock Brake System ABS applica tion is detected General Information e If a ratio other than first is selected and the vehicle is brought to a stop the transaxle control logic will automatically select the first gear ratio e If a low range is selected and the engine accelerates to the rev limit the transaxle will automatically select the next higher ratio 288 STARTING AND OPERATING e If a downshift would cause the engine to overspeed that shift will not occur until it is safe for the engine However the CVT will stay in the manually selected ratio e If the system detects powertrain overheating the transmission will revert to the automatic shift mode and remain in that mode until the powertrain cools off e If the system detects a problem it will disable the AutoStick mode and the t
354. tboard occupant that reduce the potential for side impact head injuries The SABIC airbags deploy downward covering both windows on the impact side Side Curtain Airbag Label Location NOTE e Should a vehicle rollover occur the pretensioners and or SABIC curtains on both sides of the vehicle may deploy e Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open during airbag deployment N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59 The system includes sensors adjacent to both front and rear seat occupants that are calibrated to deploy the SABIC airbags during impacts that require airbag occu pant protection WARNING e If your vehicle is equipped with left and right Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain SABIC do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the location of the SABIC The area where the side curtain airbag is located should remain free from any obstructions Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects between you and the side airbags the performance could be adversely affected and or objects could be pushed into you causing serious injury Along with seat belts and pretensioners Advanced Front Airbags work with the knee bolsters to provide improved protection for the driver and front passenger Side airbags also work with seat belts to improve occupant protection Knee Impact Bolsters The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the driver and the
355. tem TCS Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM Hill Decent Control HDC Hill Start Assist HSA and Electronic Stability Control ESC All systems work together to enhance vehicle stability and control in various driving conditions and are commonly referred to as ESC Anti Lock Brake System ABS This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking conditions The system controls hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lockup and NS TA TING AND OPERATING 309 help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking Refer to Anti Lock Brake System in this section of the manual for more information about ABS Brake Assist System BAS The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle s braking capability during emergency braking maneuvers The system detects an emergency braking situation by sens ing the rate and amount of brake application and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes This can help reduce braking distances The BAS complements the Anti Lock Brake System ABS Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance To receive the benefit of the system you must apply continuous brak ing pressure during the stopping sequence do not pump the brakes Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer desired Once the brake pedal is released the BAS is deactivated WARNING e The Brake Assist System BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics fr
356. temperature control to maximum heat the mode control to floor and the blower control to high This allows the heater core to act as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system WARNING You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant antifreeze or steam from your radiator If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 367 AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE OVERHEATING During sustained high speed driving or trailer towing up long grades on hot days the automatic transaxle oil may become too hot If this happens the transmission overheat in dicator light will come on and the vehicle will slow slightly until the automatic transaxle cools down enough to allow a return to the requested speed If the high speed is maintained the overheating will reoccur as before in a cyclic fashion 368 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES NN id JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING WARNING e Being under a jacked up vehicle is dangerous The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you You could be crushed Never put any part of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack If you need to get under a raised vehicle take it to a service center where it can be rais
357. tensioners both must be replaced Supplemental Rear Impact Active Head Restraints AHR These head restraints are passive deployable compo nents and vehicles with this equipment can not be readily identified by any markings only through visual inspection of the head restraint The head restraint will be split in two halves with the front half being soft foam and trim the back half being decorative plastic N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49 How the Active Head Restraints AHR Work The Occupant Restraint Controller ORC determines whether the severity or type of rear impact require the Active Head Restraints AHR to deploy In case of AHR deployment both driver and front passenger seat AHR s will be deployed When AHR s deploy during a rear impact the head restraint front half extends forward to minimize the gap between the back of the head and the AHR This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the extent of injuries the driver and front passenger in certain types of rear end impacts 022607508 Active Head Restraint AHR Components NOTE The Active Head Restraints AHR may or may 1 Head Restraint Front 3 Head Restraint Back Half not deploy in the event of a front or side impact arta aT coo Ge eran A However if during a front impact a secondary rear impact occurs the AHR may deploy based on the sever it
358. th a single chime e RKE Battery Low with a single chime ru e Personal Settings Not Available Vehicle not in PARK automatic transmission or vehicle is in motion e uconnect phone displays if equipped manual transmission e Compass heading e Outside temperature display e Trip computer functions e Audio mode display e Left Right Front Door Ajar one or more with a single e Tire Pressure Monitor TPM chime if speed is above 1 mph 1 km h e Left Right Rear Door Ajar one or more with a single When the appropriate conditions exist the EVIC displays chime if speed is above 1 mph 1 km h the following messages e Door s Ajar with a single chime if vehicle is in e Turn Signal On with a continuous warning chime motion after 1 mile 1 6 km of distance travelled 200 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN e Gate Ajar with a single chime e Headlamps or Park Lamps On e Key In Ignition e Check TPM System Engine Oil Change Indicator System If Equipped Oil Change Required Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system The Oil Change Required message will flash in the EVIC display for approximately five seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style Unless reset this
359. th the 4WD LOCK engaged and proceed with caution Allow engine and hill descent braking to control the descent and apply your brakes if necessary but do not allow the tires to lock WARNING Do not descend a steep grade in NEUTRAL Use vehicle brakes in conjunction with engine braking Descending a grade too fast could cause you to lose control and be seriously injured Driving Across An Incline If at all possible avoid driving across an incline If it is necessary know your vehicle s abilities Driving across an incline places more weight on the down hill wheels which increases the possibilities of a down hill slide or rollover Make sure the surface has good traction with firm and stable soils If possible transverse the incline at an angle heading slightly up or down WARNING Driving across an incline increases the risk of a rollover which may result in severe injury 298 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id If You Stall Or Begin To Lose Headway If you stall or begin to lose headway while climbing a steep hill allow your vehicle to come to a stop and immediately apply the brake Restart the engine and shift to REVERSE Back slowly down the hill allowing engine and hill descent braking to control the descent and apply your brakes if necessary but do not allow the tires to lock WARNING If the engine stalls or you lose headway or cannot make it to the top of a steep hill or grade never attempt to turn around To do
360. that an oil change is necessary Based on engine operation condition the oil change indicator message will illuminate this means that service is required for your vehicle Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next 500 miles 805 km N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 427 NOTE Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator e The oil change indicator message will not monitor the message after completing the scheduled oil change If this time since the last oil change Change your vehicle s scheduled oil change is performed by someone other oil if it has been six months since your last oil change than your authorized dealer the message can be reset by and even if the oil change indicator message is NOT referring to the steps described under Oil Change illuminated Required in Use Factory Settings of the EVIC section in this manual or under Odometer Trip Odometer in the Instrument Cluster Descriptions section of this manual At Each Stop for Fuel e Change your engine oil more often if you drive your vehicle off road for an extended period of time e Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 6 000 miles 10 000 km or six months which ever comes first e Check the engine oil level about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off Checking the oil level while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level reading Add oil only when the level is at or
361. the FF gt gt button A single press backward lt lt RW or forward FF gt gt will jump backward or forward respectively for five seconds Use the lt lt SEEK and SEEK gt gt buttons to jump to the previous or next track If the lt lt SEEK button is pressed during the first two seconds of the track it will jump to the previous track in the list if you press this button at any other time in the track it will jump to the beginning of the track If you press the SEEK gt gt button during play mode it will jump to the next track in the list While a track is playing press the INFO button to see the associated metadata artist track title album etc for that track Pressing the INFO button again jumps to the next screen of data for that track Once you have seen all screens the last INFO button press will take you back to the play mode screen on the radio Pressing the REPEAT button will change the iPod mode to repeat the current playing track Press the SCAN button to use iPod scan mode which will play the first five seconds of each track in the current list and then forward to the next song To stop SCAN mode and start playing the desired track when it is playing the track press the SCAN button again During Scan mode you can also press the lt lt SEEK and SEEK gt gt buttons to select the previous and next tracks RND button available on sales code RES radio only Pressing this button toggles betw
362. the SEEK button will allow you to scroll through the tracks faster in CD and MP3 MWA modes SCAN Button CD MODE Press the SCAN button to scan through each track on the CD currently playing TIME Button CD MODE Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display RW FF CD MODE Press and hold FF Fast Forward and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Rewind button works in a similar manner AM or FM Button CD MODE Switches the radio into the AM or FM radio mode Notes On Playing MP3 WMA Files The radio can play MP3 WMA files however acceptable MP3 WMA file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 WMA files pay attention to the following restrictions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 WMA file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 WMA DVD Video DVD R DVD RW DVD R DVD RW and CDDA MP3 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 219 The radio uses the following limits for file s
363. the engine as soon as possible A chime will sound for four minutes when this light turns on Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine The engine oil level must be checked under the hood 5 Low Fuel Light When the fuel level reaches approximately 2 0 gal 7 8 L this light will tum on and remain on until fuel is added 6 Speedometer Indicates vehicle speed 7 Airbag Warning Light This light turns on and remains on for six to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition PN switch is first turned ON If the light is not on during starting stays on or turns on while driving have the system inspected by an authorized dealer as soon as possible 8 Turn Signal Indicators amp The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal when the turn signal lever is operated 9 High Beam Indicator ED This indicator shows that the high beam head lights are on Push the multifunction lever forward to switch the headlights to high beam and pull toward yourself normal position to return to low beam 10 Anti Lock Brake ABS Light If Equipped This light monitors the Anti Lock Brake System ies ABS The light will turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may stay on for as long as four seconds If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving it indicates that the Anti Lock portion of the brake system
364. the floor outlets This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but cool conditions e Floor Air is directed through the floor outlets with a small amount flowing through the defrost and side window demist outlets e Mix Pe Air is directed through the floor defrost and side ef window demist outlets This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield e Defrost CH Air is directed through the windshield and side window demist outlets Use this mode with maxi mum blower and temperature settings for best wind shield and side window defrosting NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 269 e Air Conditioner Control NOTE Press this button to turn on the air When the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK conditioning during manual operation position the recirculation feature will be cancelled only When the air conditioning is turned on cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets selected with 04560755 the Mode control dial Press this but ton a second time to turn OFF the air conditioning An LED in the button illuminates when manual compressor operation is selected e In cold weather use of the Recirculation mode may lead to excessive window fogging The Recirculation mode is not allowed in the floor defrost or defrost floor mode in order to improve window
365. the temperature gauge to pass H the indicator will continuously flash and a continuous chime will occur until the engine is allowed to cool If the light turns on while driving safely pull over and stop the vehicle If the A C system is on turn it off Also shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the ve hicle If the temperature reading does not return to normal turn the engine off immediately and call for service Refer to If Your Engine Overheats in Section 6 for more information 14 Brake Warning Light This light monitors various brake functions including brake fluid level and parking brake application If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied that the brake fluid level is low or that there is a problem with the anti lock brake system reservoir BRAKE If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged and the fluid level is at the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti Lock Brake System ABS Electronic Stability Control ESC system In this case the light will remain on until the condition has been corrected If the problem is related to the brake booster the ABS pump will run when applying the brake and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac ity in
366. the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil iary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to the proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down 248 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press this button to change the display to time of day The time of day will display for five seconds when the ignition is OFF Operating Instructions uconnect phone If Equipped Refer to uconnect phone in Section 3 Operating Instructions uconnect studios Satellite Radio If Equipped Refer to uconnect studios Satellite Radio in this section UNIVERSAL CONSUMER INTERFACE UCI IF EQUIPPED NOTE This section is for sales code RES and REQ REL RET radios only with uconnect For sales code RER RBZ REN REP REW RB2 or REZ touch screen radio UCI feature refer to the separate RER REN RBZ RB2 or REZ User s Manual UCI is available only if equipped as an option with these radios This feature allows you to plug an iPod into the vehicle s sound system through a 16 pin connector using the provided interface cable UCI supports Mini 4G Photo Nano 5G iPod and iPhone devices Some iPod sof
367. tic bul can be overridden Automatic Automatic Mode Preferred Automatic Blower and Mode Preferred Automatic Sct mode knob to any desired air delivery point other than Auto Set blower knob to Auto Set temperature knobs for comfort Set blower knob to any desired airflow level other than Auto Set mode knob to any desired air delivery point other than Auto Set temperature knobs for comfort Automatic User selectable to any speed User selectable to any air delivery point User selectable to any air delivery point Automatic Automatic User selcctable outside or recirculated User selectable oulstde or recirculated User selectable A C on or off User selectable A C on or off 045609172 268 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN The operator can override the AUTO mode setting to change airflow distribution by rotating the Mode Control knob on the right to one of the following positions e Panel p Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument panel These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow NOTE The center instrument panel outlets can be aimed so that they are directed toward the rear seat passengers for maximum airflow to the rear e Bi Level ugh Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets NOTE For all settings except full cold or full hot there is a difference in temperature between the upper and lower outlets The warmer air flows to
368. ting too hot and the vehicle should be stopped to allow the brakes to cool WARNING HDC is only intended to assist the driver in control ling vehicle speed when descending hills The driver must remain attentive to the driving conditions and is responsible for maintaining a safe vehicle speed Hill Start Assist HSA Manual Transaxle or Off Road Package Only The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when starting a vehicle from a stop ona hill HSA will maintain the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short period of time after the driver takes their foot off of the brake pedal If the driver does not apply the throttle during this short period of time the system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill The system will release brake pressure in proportion to amount of throttle applied as the vehicle starts to move in the intended direction of travel HSA Activation Criteria The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to activate e Vehicle must be stopped e Vehicle must be on a 7 grade or greater hill NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 313 e Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction i e vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear vehicle back ing uphill is in REVERSE gear WARNING There may be situations on minor hills i e less than 8 with a loaded vehicle or while pulling a trailer when the system will not activate and slight rolling may occur
369. tion Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM 12 FM and 12 Satellite if equipped stations to be stored into pushbutton memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM 12 FM and 12 Satellite if equipped stations DISC Button Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to Disc modes Operation Instructions DISC MODE for CD and MP3 WMA Audio Play DVD VIDEO The radio DVD player and many DVD discs are coded by geographic region These region codes must match in order for the disc to play If the region code for the DVD disc does not match the region code for the radio DVD player it will not play the disc Customers may take their vehicle to an authorized dealer to change the region code of the player a maximum of five times NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 217 CAUTION The radio may shut down during extremely hot conditions When this occurs the radio will indicate Disc Hot and shut off until a safe temperature is reached This shutdown is necessary to protect the optics of the DVD player and other radio internal components NOTE Th
370. tions HO Compass Temperature Audio O Average Fuel Economy o Distance To Empty DTE D Tire Pressure Monitor TPM HEL eed MG a ssaa oh ED HER 9 diuo dep as 203 O Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features 203 ll Sales Code REQ AM FM Stereo Radio And 6 Disc CD DVD Changer MPI WMA AUX Jack his 3 6 2d A ene rm 2 208 O Operating Instructions Radio Mode 208 180 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN ed D Operation Instructions Disc Mode For CD And MP3 WMA Audio Play DVD Video 216 H Notes On Playing MP3 WMA Files 218 O List Button Disc Mode For MP3 WMA Play 221 G Info Button Disc Mode For MP3 WMA Play 221 W Sales Code RER REN Rbz AM FM CD DER dio quippe a 2 29 059 2 2 9 6 225 O Operating Instructions Voice Recognition System VR If Equipped 223 D Operating Instructions uconnect phone If Equipped 224 oO Clock Setting Procedure Rbz Radio 224 B Clock Setting Procedure RER REN Radio ss iau s oo eth ou Ge eo 225 ll Sales Code RES AM FM Stereo Radio With CD Player MP3 AUX Jack soes aono 228 O Operating Instructions Radio Mode 228 D Operation Instructions CD Mode For CD And MP3 Audio Play oi m ERR 291 o Notes On Playing MP3 Files oi ss ears se 233 O Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode 236 ll Sales Code RES RSC AM FM Stereo Radio With CD
371. tist track title album etc information on the radio display e The iPod can be controlled using the radio buttons to ru Play Browse and List the iPod contents e The iPod battery charges when plugged into the UCI connector if supported by the specific iPod device Controlling The iPod Using Radio Buttons To get into the UCI iPod9 mode and access a connected iPod press the AUX button on the radio faceplate Once in the UCI iPod mode iPod audio tracks if available from iPod start playing over the vehicle s audio system 250 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Play Mode When switched to UCI mode the iPod automatically starts Play mode In Play mode you may use the following buttons on the radio faceplate to control the iPod and display data e Use the TUNE control knob to select the next or previous track e Turning it clockwise forward by one click while playing a track skips to the next track e Turning it counterclockwise backward by one click during the first two seconds of the track will jump to the previous track in the list Turning this button at any other time in the track will jump to the beginning of the current track e Jump backward in the current track by pressing and holding the lt lt RW button Holding the lt lt RW button long enough will take you to the beginning of the current track e Jump forward in the current track by pressing and holding
372. to avoid scratching the plastic 7 1 Clean with a wet soft rag A mild soap solution may be used but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners If soap is used wipe clean with a clean damp rag 2 Dry with a soft cloth 412 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Seat Belt Maintenance Do not bleach dye or clean the seat belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners This will weaken the fabric Sun damage can also weaken the fabric If the seat belts need cleaning use a mild soap solution or lukewarm water Do not remove the seat belts from the car to wash them Replace the seat belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly Dry with a soft cloth FUSES Integrated Power Module IPM The Integrated Power Module IPM is located in the engine compartment near the air cleaner assembly This center contains cartridge fuses and mini fuses A label that identifies each component may be printed on the inside of the cover Refer to Engine Compartment in this section of the Owner s Manual for the underhood location of the IPM Cav Cartridge Mini Description ity Fuse Fuse 1 j Empy Empty 15 Amp AWD 4WD ECU Feed Lt Blue Ignition Switch Feed OCM IOD Sw Pwr Mir Steering Cntrl Sdar Hands Free Phone MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 413 Cav Cartridge Mini Description Cav Cartridge Mini Description ity Fuse Fuse ity Fuse Fuse 15 Amp IG
373. to cushion shock Objects on the road and chuckholes can Overloading of your tires is dangerous Overloading can cause tire failure affect vehicle handling and increase your stopping distance Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle Never overload them TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION Tire Pressure cause damage that result in tire failure Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob satisfactory operation of your vehicle Three primary lems You could lose control of your vehicle areas are affected by improper tire pressure Over inflated or under inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly resulting in loss of vehicle control Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 327 WARNING Continued e Unequal tire pressures from one side of the ve hicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left e Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom mended cold tire inflation pressure Economy Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier tire replacement Under inflation also increases tire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel consumption Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride Over inflation produces
374. ton The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer NOTE You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next step after the LEARN button has been pressed 7 Return to the vehicle and press the programmed HomeLink button twice holding the button for two seconds each time If the device is plugged in and activates programming is complete If the device does not activate press the button a third time for two seconds to complete the training If you have any problems or require assistance please call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for information or assistance To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons repeat each step for each remaining button DO NOT erase the channels Gate Operator Canadian Programming Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig nals to time out or quit after several seconds of transmission which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming Similar to this Canadian law some U S gate operators are designed to time out in the same manner It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent possible overheating of the garage door or gate motor If you are having difficulties programming a garage door opener or a gate operator replace Programming HomeLink Step 3 with the following 3 Continue to press and hold the HomeLink button while you press and rel
375. transmission was in gear and the vehicle speed 2 Within 15 seconds cycle the ignition switch between returned to 0 mph 0 km h LOCK and ON and then back to LOCK four times ending 3 The transmission is in NEUTRAL or PARK up in the LOCK position do not start the engine 3 Within 30 seconds depress the power door UNLOCK 4 The driver s door is opened switch to unlock the doors 5 The doors were not previously unlocked NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31 4 A single chime will indicate the completion of the Child Protection Door Lock System Rear Doors programming Insert the tip of the ignition key into the lock and rotate 5 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to to the LOCK or UNLOCK position its previous setting NOTE e f you do not hear the chime it means that the system did not enter the programming mode and you will need to repeat the procedure e Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature in accordance with local laws T 021806188 Child Protection Door Lock Location 32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id 021806189 Child Protection Door Lock Function WARNING Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision Remember that the rear doors can only be opened from the outside when the child protection locks are engaged NOTE For emergency exit with the system engaged move the lock plunger up unlocked position roll down the win
376. trol is set push down and hold the SET DECEL lever If the lever is continually held in the SET DECEL position the set speed will continue to decrease until the lever is released Release the lever when the desired speed is reached and the new set speed will be established Tapping the SET DECEL lever once will result in a 1 mph 1 6 km h speed decrease Each time the lever is tapped speed decreases Manual Transaxle Pressing the clutch pedal will disengage the Electronic Speed Control A slight increase in engine RPM before the speed control disengages is normal Vehicles equipped with manual transaxles may need to be shifted into a lower gear to climb hills without speed loss WARNING Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the system cannot maintain a constant speed Your ve hicle could go too fast for the conditions and you could lose control An accident could be the result Do not use Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding icy snow covered or slippery N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151 WARNING Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the system cannot maintain a constant speed Your ve hicle could go too fast for the conditions and you To Accelerate for Passing Press the accelerator as you would normally When the pedal is released the vehicle will return to the set speed Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills NOTE The Electronic
377. tronic ORC deploys the Advanced Front Airbags SABIC air bags Supplemental Side Seat Airbags if equipped and front seat belt pretensioners if equipped as required depending on severity and type of impact Advanced Front Airbags are designed to provide addi tional protection by supplementing the seat belts in certain frontal collisions depending on the severity and type of collision Advanced Front Airbags are not ex pected to reduce the risk of injury in rear side or rollover collisions 62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME The Advanced Front Airbags will not deploy in all frontal collisions including some that may produce substantial vehicle damage for example some pole collisions truck underrides and angle offset collisions On the other hand depending on the type and location of impact Advanced Front Airbags may deploy in crashes with little vehicle front end damage but that produce a severe initial deceleration The side airbags will not deploy in all side collisions Side airbag deployment will depend on the severity and type of collision Because airbag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over time vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not good indicators of whether or not an airbag should have deployed Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all colli sions and also are needed to help keep you in position away from an inflating airbag The ORC monitors the readiness o
378. ts throughout their pregnancy Keeping the mother safe is the best way to keep the baby safe Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the abdomen That way the strong bones of the hips will take the force if there is a collision Supplemental Restraint System SRS Airbags This vehicle has airbags for both the driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems The driver s front airbag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel The passenger s front airbag is mounted in the instrument panel above the glove compartment The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the airbag covers Front Airbags and Knee Bolsters 1 Driver and Passenger Airbag 2 Knee Boltser NOTE These airbags are certified to the new Federal regulations for Advanced Airbags The Advanced Front Airbags have a multistage inflator design This allows the airbag to have different rates of inflation that are based on the severity and type of collision THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55 This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains SABIC to protect the driver front and rear passengers sitting next to a window The SABIC are located above the side windows The trim covering the side airbags is labeled SRS AIRBAG NOTE Airbag covers may not be obvious
379. tside mirrors and fasten your seat belts pressed to the floor e If the key will not turn and the steering wheel is dus o TINS locked rotate the wheel in either direction to relieve Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving pressure on the locking mechanism and then turn the unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a key number of reasons A child or others could be seri ig Automatic Transaxle If Equipped aay iia fatty injured Pa not ev tue ney ane The shift lever must be in the PARK or NEUTRAL ignition A child could operate power windows l position before you can start the engine Apply the brakes other controls or move the vehicle in before shifting to any driving gear Manual Transaxle If Equipped NOTE You must press the brake pedal before shifting Before starting the engine fully apply the parking brake out of PARK press the clutch pedal to the floor and place the shift Tip Start lever in NEUTRAL P NOTE Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 279 Do not press the accelerator Turn the ignition switch to the START position and release it as soon as the starter engages The starter motor will continue to run and it will disengage automatically when the engine is running If the engine fails to start the starter will disengage automatically in 10 seconds If this occurs turn the ignit
380. tware versions may not fully support the UCI features Please visit Apple s website for software updates NOTE e If the radio has a USB port connecting an iPod to this port does not play the media For playing an iPod use the separate 16 pin connector port in the glove compartment on some vehicles e Connecting an iPod to the AUX port located in the radio faceplate plays media but does not use the UCI feature to control the connected device N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 249 Connecting The iPod Use the provided connection cable to connect an iPod to the vehicle s 16 pin connector port which is located in the glove compartment on some vehicles Once the iPod is connected and synchronized to the vehicle s UCI system iPod may take a few seconds to connect the iPod starts charging and is ready for use by pressing radio switches as described below NOTE e You may have to remove the connector pin protection cap from the 16 pin connector port prior to connect ing the cable e f the iPod battery is completely discharged it may not communicate with the UCI system until a mini mum charge is attained Leaving the iPod connected to the UCI system may charge it to the required level Using This Feature By using the provided connection cable to connect an iPod to the vehicle s UCI 16 pin connector port e The iPod audio can be played on the vehicle s sound system providing metadata ar
381. uipment may cause severe per sonal injuries and death CAUTION An unlocked vehicle is an invitation to thieves Always remove the key from the ignition and lock all of the doors when leaving the vehicle unattended 28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Power Door Locks A power door lock switch is located on the driver s door panel Press this switch to lock or unlock the doors and liftgate NOTE To prevent from locking the key in the vehicle the power door lock switch will not operate when the key is in the ignition and either front door is open A chime will sound as a reminder to remove the key 021806187 Driver Power Door Lock Switch 1 Unlock 2 Lock Automatic Door Locks If Equipped The doors will lock automatically on vehicles with power door locks if all of the following conditions are met 1 The Auto Lock feature is enabled N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29 2 The transmission is in gear 3 All doors are closed 4 The throttle is pressed 5 The vehicle speed is above 15 mph 24 km h and 6 The doors were not previously locked using the power door lock switch or Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter Automatic Door Locks Programming The Automatic Door Locks feature can be enabled or disabled as follows e For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Infor mation Center EVIC refer to Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under
382. upplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains SABIC for the driver and passengers seated next to a window e Supplemental Side Seat Airbags if equipped e An energy absorbing steering column and steering wheel e Knee bolsters blockers for front seat occupants e Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners to enhance occupant protection by managing occupant energy during an impact event if equipped e All seat belt systems except the driver s include Automatic Locking Retractors ALRs which lock the seat belt webbing into position by extending the belt all the way out and then adjusting the belt to the desired length to restrain a child seat or secure a large item in a seat if equipped If you will be carrying children too small for adult sized seat belts the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH feature also can be used to hold N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37 infant and child restraint systems For more information on LATCH see Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH in this section NOTE The Advanced Front Airbags have a multistage inflator design This allows the airbag to have different rates of inflation based on severity and type of collision Please pay close attention to the information in this section It tells you how to use your restraint system properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible WARNING In a collision you and your passengers
383. ur vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed e Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly 126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id Front Seat Adjustment WARNING The adjusting bar is at the front of the seats near the floor Pull the bar upward to move the seat forward or Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is rearward Release the bar once the seat is in the position dangerous The sudden movement of the seat could desired Then using body pressure move forward and cause you to lose control The seat belt might not be rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters properly adjusted and you could be injured Adjust have latched the seat only while the vehicle is parked 030907665 Front Seat Adjustment UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127 Manual Seat Height Adjustment If Equipped Manual Lumbar If Equipped The driver s seat height can be raised or lowered by using The lumbar adjustment handle is located on the outboard the handle on the outboard side of the seat to adjust the side of the driver s seat To increase or decrease support driving position rotate the handle up or down 030907660 030907661 Seat Height Adjustment Lumbar Adjustment 128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M To recline the seatback
384. ure that all seat belts not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out of reach of children It is recommended that before installing the child restraint buckle the seat belt so the seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of reach If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint installation instead of tucking the seat belt behind the child restraint route the seat belt through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it This should stow the seat belt out of the reach of an inquisitive child Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and should not be played with and never leave your child unattended in the vehicle Installing the Child Restraint System We urge you to carefully follow the directions of the manufacturer when installing your child restraint Many but not all restraint systems will be equipped with separate straps on each side with each having a hook or connector and a means for adjusting the tension in the strap Forward facing toddler restraints and some rearward facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap with a hook and means for adjusting the tension in the strap 78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE In general you will first loosen the adjusters on the lower and tether straps so that you can attach the hook or connector to the lower and tether anchorages more easily The tether strap should be routed over the
385. ving style e Tire pressure e Distance driven WARNING Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six years regardless of the remaining tread Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure You could lose control and have an accident resulting in serious injury or death Keep dismounted tires in a cool dry place with as little exposure to light as possible Protect tires from contact with oil grease and gasoline Replacement Tires The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure The manu facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva lent to the originals in size quality and performance when replacement is needed Refer to the paragraph on Tread Wear Indicators Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard for the size designation of your tire The service description and load identification will be found on the original equipment tire Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety handling and ride of your vehicle We recommend that you contact your original equipment or an autho rized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 333 WARNING WARNING Continued e Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having adequate speed capability can result in sudden tir
386. w disc can be loaded If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio ON the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc The display will show the track number and index time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start of track 1 232 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id CAUTION e This CD player will accept 4 3 4 in 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism Do not use adhesive labels These labels can peel away and jam the player mechanism RES is a single CD player Do not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already loaded Dual media disc types one side is a DVD the other side is a CD should not be used and they can cause damage to the player EJECT Button Ejecting a CD Press the EJECT button to eject the CD If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 10 seconds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF NOTE Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on convertible or soft top models if equipped SEEK Button Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection Pressi
387. ways use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield Make sure that they are not frozen to the glass before turning them on to avoid damaging the blade Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil gasoline etc NOTE Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depend ing on geographical area and freguency of use Poor performance of blades may be present with chattering marks water lines or wet spots If any condition is present please proceed to clean wiper blades with humid cloth removing any debris that may be affecting its function Adding Washer Fluid The washer fluid reservoir is located in the engine compartment and the fluid level should be checked at regular intervals Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent only not radiator antifreeze WARNING Commercially available windshield washer solvents are flammable They could ignite and burn you Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution Exhaust System The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 395 CAUTION The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only Leaded gasoline will destroy the effective If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system or
388. wheel nuts with the cone shaped end of the nuts toward the wheel Lightly tighten the nuts To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack do not tighten the nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered 7 Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left 8 Finish tightening the nuts Push down on the wrench while tightening the wheel nuts Alternate nuts until each nut has been tightened twice The correct wheel nut torque is 100 ft Ibs 135 N m If you doubt that you have tightened the nuts correctly have them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service station 9 Remove the wheel blocks and lower the jack until it is free Reassemble the lug wrench to the jack assembly and stow it in the spare tire area Secure the assembly using the means provided WARNING A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve hicle Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided N WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 373 10 Place the deflated flat tire in the cargo area Have battery or the battery in another vehicle This type of start the tire repaired or replaced as soon as possible can be dangerous if done improperly so follow this procedure carefully WARNING A loose tire thrown forward in a collision or hard e Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when ever the hood is raised It can start anytime the ign
389. with the engine running If the ESC Indicator Light comes on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system If this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles kilometers at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your autho rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected The ESC Malfunction Indicator Light located in the instrument cluster starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active The ESC Malfunction Indicator Light also flashes when TCS is active If the ESC Malfunction Indicator Light begins to flash during acceleration ease up on the accelerator and UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 197 apply as little throttle as possible Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions NOTE e The ESC Indicator Light come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON e Each time the ignition is turned ON the ESC system will be ON even if it was turned off previously e The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active This is normal the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESC activation 30 4WD Warning Light This light monitors the 4 Wheel Drive 4WD system The light will come on for a bulb check when the ignition key is turned to
390. y a command e g Help 3 Use the ON OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Recogni tion VR system is speaking Please note the volume setting for VR is different than the audio system Main Menu Start a dialogue by pressing the amp button You may say Main Menu to switch to the main menu In this mode you can say the following commands e Radio to switch to the radio mode e Disc to switch to the disc mode e Memo to switch to the memo recorder e System Setup to switch to system setup Radio AM or Radio Long Wave or Radio Medium Wave If Equipped To switch to the AM band say AM or Radio AM In this mode you may say the following commands e Frequency to change the frequency e Next Station to select the next station e Previous Station to select the previous station e Radio Menu to switch to the radio menu e Main Menu to switch to the main menu Radio FM To switch to the FM band say FM or Radio FM In this mode you may say the following commands e Frequency to change the frequency e Next Station to select the next station e Previous Station to select the previous station N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123 e Radio Menu to switch to the radio menu Disc seke Moe een casn To switch to the disc mode say Disc
391. y an authorized Chrysler Group LLC dealership or qualified repair center Continued N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 387 CAUTION Continued e Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids that protect the performance and durability of your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance intervals Do not use chemical flushes in these components as the chemicals can damage your engine transmission power steering or air condi tioning Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty If a flush is needed because of component malfunction use only the specified fluid for the flushing procedure Engine Oil Checking Oil Level To assure proper engine lubrication the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level Check the oil level at regular intervals such as every fuel stop The best time to check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off Do not check oil level before starting the engine after it has sat overnight Checking engine oil level when the engine is cold will give you an incorrect reading Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground and only when the engine is hot will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings Maintain the oil level between the range markings on the dipstick The range markings will consist of a crosshatch zone that says SAFE or a cross hatch zone that says MIN at the low end of the range and MAX at the high end of the
392. y and type of the impact 50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION 1 Grasp the deployed AHR from the rear seat All occupants including the driver should not oper ate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle s seat until the head restraints are placed in their proper positions in order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of an accident NOTE For more information on properly adjusting and positioning the head restraint refer to Section 3 Adjust ing Active Head Restraints Resetting Active Head Restraints AHR If the Active Head Restraints are triggered in an accident you must reset the head restraint on the driver s and front passenger seat You can recognize when the Active Head Restraint has been triggered by the fact that they have moved forward as shown in step three of the resetting procedure 022607492 Hand Positioning Points On AHR 2 Position the hands on the top of the deployed AHR at a comfortable position THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51 3 Pull down then rearward towards the rear of the 3 vehicle then down to engage the locking mechanism J 022607757 E 3 Final Downward Movement To Engage Locking 022607497 Mechanism 1 Downward Movement 2 Rearward Movement 52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id 4 The AHR front soft foam and trim half should lock into the back decorative plastic half 022607494
393. y with temperature by about 1 psi 6 9 kPa for every 12 F 6 5 C This means that when the outside temperature decreases the tire pressure will decrease Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure This is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after a three hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall Refer to Tires General Information in this section for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle s tires The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven this is normal and there should be no adjustment for this increased pressure 336 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning limit for any reason including low temperature effects or natural pressure loss through the tire The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition exists and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended cold placard pressure Once the low tire pressure warn ing Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light illuminates you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended cold placard pressure in order for the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to turn off The system will
394. your lap 022607724 Pulling Out The Latch Plate 40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id WARNING WARNING Continued e A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will e A belt that is worn under your arm is very danger not protect you properly The lap portion could ride too high on your body possibly causing internal injuries Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you A belt that is too loose will not protect you as well In a sudden stop you could move too far forward increasing the possibility of injury Wear your seat belt snugly Continued ous Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision increasing head and neck injury A belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries Ribs aren t as strong as shoulder bones Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force in a collision A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from injury during a collision You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41 4 Position the lap belt across your thighs below your abdomen To remove slack in the lap belt portion pull up WARNING on the shoulder belt To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight e A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of tilt the l
395. ystems e Maximum number of directory levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders 100 e Maximum number of characters in file folder names e Level 1 12 including a separator and a three character extension e Level 2 31 including a separator and a three character extension Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 WMA files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 WMA playback may result in longer disc loading times If a disc contains multi formats such as CD audio and MP3 WMA tracks the radio will only play the MP3 WMA tracks on that disc Supported MP3 WMA File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 WMA extension as MP3 WMA files Non MP3 WMA files named with the MP3 WMA extension may cause play back problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 WMA and will not play the file When using the MP3 WMA encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 WMA file the bit rate and sampling freguencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 WMA files use a 44 1 kHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rates 220 UNDERSTANDI

Owner`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents